BNP C3015 PDF

CNC
AC SPINDLE MDS-B-SPT Series MDS-C1-SPT Series
SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTION MANUAL
BNP-C3015A(ENG)
Introduction
Thank you for selecting the Mitsubishi spindle drive unit. This instruction manual describes the handling and caution points for using this AC spindle. Incorrect handling may lead to unforeseen accidents, so always read this instruction manual thoroughly to ensure correct usage. Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user. Always store this manual in a safe place. All specifications for the MDS-B/C1-SPT Series are described in this manual. However, each CNC may not be provided with all specifications, so refer to the specifications for the CNC on hand before starting use.
Notes on Reading This Manual

(1) This is the MDS-B/C1-SPT Series Specifications Manual corresponding to the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2". (2) Since the description of this specification manual deals with the spindle system in general, for the specifications of individual machine tools, refer to the manuals issued by the respective machine manufacturers. The "restrictions" and "available functions" described in the manuals issued by the machine manufacturers have precedence to those in this manual. (3) This manual describes as many special operations as possible, but it should be kept in mind that items not mentioned in this manual cannot be performed.
Precautions for safety

Please read this manual and auxiliary documents before starting installation, operation, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct usage. Thoroughly understand the device, safety information and precautions before starting operation. The safety precautions in this instruction manual are ranked as "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
WARNING
Incorrect handling could lead to a hazardous situation and result in fatalities or serious injuries. When a dangerous situation may occur if handling is mistaken leading to medium or minor injuries, or physical damage.
CAUTION
Note that some items described as
CAUTION may lead to major results depending on
the situation. In any case, important information that must be observed is described.
1) In this manual, the following items are generically called the "spindle amplifier". Spindle drive unit Power supply unit
Changes to terminal names The terminal names have been changed in two stages as shown below.
Before March 1995 R S T P N Ro So G Between April 1995 and March 1996 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 L+/P L-/N L11/Ro L21/So G/ After April 1996 L1 L2 L3 L+ LL11 L21
Terminal name
ii
For Safety Use

1. Electric shock prevention
WARNING
Do not open the spindle amplifier's front cover or the spindle motor's terminal box cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks. Do not turn the power ON with the spindle amplifier's front cover or spindle motor's terminal box cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and could result in electric shocks. Do not remove the front cover even when the power is OFF except for wiring work or periodic inspections. The spindle amplifier is charged and could result in electric shocks. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the power OFF and LED on spindle amplifier turning OFF before starting wiring or inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks. Ground the spindle motor and spindle amplifier with Class 3 or higher grounding. Wiring, maintenance, and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician. Wire the spindle motor and spindle amplifier after installation. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks. Do not operate the spindle amplifier switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks.. Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
2. Fire prevention
CAUTION
Install the spindle motor, spindle amplifier, and regenerative resistor on non-combustible material. Direct installation on combustible material or near combustible materials could lead to fires. Shut off the power on the spindle amplifier's power side, if a fault occurs in the spindle amplifier. Fires could be caused if a large current continues to flow. When using the regenerative resistor, shut off the power with an error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and cause a fire due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc.
3. Injury prevention
CAUTION
Do not apply a voltage on each terminal other than that indicated in the Specification Manual or Instruction Manual. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc. Do not mistake the terminal connections. Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc. Do not mistake the DC voltage polarity (+, -). Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns. iii
4. Various precautions Observe the following precautions. Incorrect handling of the unit could lead to faults, injuries and electric shocks, etc. (1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Use the spindle motor's suspension bolts only to transport the spindle motor. Do not transport the spindle motor when it is installed on the machine. Do not stack the spindle motors and spindle amplifiers above the indicated limit. Do not hold the cables, shaft or detector when transporting the spindle motor. Do not transport the spindle amplifier by holding the connected wires or cables. Do not hold the front cover, side covers or fins when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop or be damaged. Follow the instruction manual, and install the spindle motor and spindle amplifier at a place which can withstand the mass. Do not get on the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. Do not place heavy objects on the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. Always observe the indicated spindle motor and spindle amplifier installation direction. Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control panel and between other devices. Do not install or operate a spindle motor or spindle amplifier that is damaged or missing parts. Provide the specified distance between the spindle motor cooling fan's intake/outtake ports and other devices and between other machines' metal parts. Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such as oil enter the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. The spindle motor and spindle amplifier are precision devices. Do not drop them or apply strong impacts. Store and use the spindle motor and spindle amplifier within the following environmental conditions. Conditions Spindle amplifier 0C to +55C (with no freezing) To follow separate specifications To follow separate specifications To follow separate specifications Spindle motor 0C to +40C (with no freezing) 80%RH or less (with no dew condensation) -15C to +70C
Environment Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Storage temperature Storage humidity Atmosphere Altitude Vibration
90% RH or less (with no dew condensation) Indoors (Where unit is not subject to direct sunlight) With no corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist or dust 1000m or less above sea level To follow separate specifications
iv
CAUTION
Securely fix the spindle motor onto the machine. Insufficient fixing may result in dislocation during operation. Always provide a cover, etc., on the shaft so that the spindle motor's rotating sections cannot be touched while the spindle motor is rotating. When coupling the spindle motor's shaft end to the machine's shaft, pulley or gears, etc., do not apply an impact on the spindle motor with a hammer, etc. Failure to observe this could result in bearing damage or detector faults. Do not apply a load exceeding the tolerable load onto the spindle motor shaft. Failure to observe this could result in bearing damage or shaft breakage. Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle motor or spindle amplifier for a long time. (2) Wiring
CAUTION
Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the spindle motor.
Spindle amplifier
Do not install a condensing capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter on the output side of the spindle amplifier. Correctly connect the output side (terminals U, V, W). Failure to do so could lead to abnormal operation of the spindle motor. Do not directly connect a commercial power supply to the spindle motor. Doing so could lead to faults.
VIN (24VDC)
Control output signal
When using an inductive load such as a relay on the control output signal, always connect a diode in parallel to the load as a measure against noise. When using a capacitance load such as a lamp for the control output signal, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load as a measure against noise. Do not mistake the polarity of the noise (surge) absorption diode installed on the DC relay for the control output signal. The faulty signal will not be output and the spindle amplifier could fail. Do not connect or disconnect the cables connected to each connector or terminal while the power is ON. Securely tighten the cable connector fixing screw or fixing mechanism. Insufficient fixing could result in dislocation while the power is ON. If use of a shielded cable is indicated in the connection diagram for the signal wires connected to the spindle amplifier, always use a shielded cable, and always connect the shield to the connector clamp. Always separate the signal wires connected to the spindle motor and spindle amplifier from the drive wires and power wires. Always use wires and cables having a wire diameter, heat resistance and flexibility compatible with the system. Fix part of the cable connected to each spindle amplifier connector to part of the control panel so that connector is not pulled forward or vertically. Do not relay the speed detector or position detector cables. Failure to observe this could result in vibration, noise or positional deviation.
(3) Trial operation and adjustment
WARNING
When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as soon as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this could result in personal injury. When monitoring the state of the spindle or spindle motor with a personal computer, if the spindle motor's maximum speed is set to 33000r/min or more or if parameter SP257 is set to "0002", the spindle motor speed displayed on the personal computer will be half of the actual speed. Failure to note this could result in spindle damage.
CAUTION
Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result depending on the machine. Do not make remarkable adjustments and changes as the operation could become unstable. (4) Usage methods
CAUTION
Install an external emergency stop circuit so that the operation can be stopped and power shut off immediately. Turn the power OFF immediately if any smoke, abnormal noise or odors are generated from the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. Only a qualified technician may disassemble or repair this product. Never make modifications. Connect a noise filter, etc., on the spindle amplifier power lead-in wire to reduce the effect of electromagnetic disturbances. Electronic devices used near the spindle amplifier could be affected by the electromagnetic disturbances. Use the spindle motor, spindle amplifier and regenerative resistor in the designated combination. Failure to observe this could result in fires or faults. After changing the parameters, maintenance or inspection, always carry out a trial operation before starting actual operation. Do not place hands or feet near the spindle during rotation. Use the power (input voltage, input frequency, tolerable sudden power failure time) under the power specification conditions given in the individual Specifications. Install a surge killer on coils for solenoid valves and contactors, etc., used near the spindle amplifier to prevent noise. Failure to do so could result in malfunctions. (5) Troubleshooting
CAUTION
If a hazardous situation could arise during a power failure or product fault, provide an external brake mechanism for holding purposes. Turn the power OFF if an alarm occurs. Never go near the machine after restoring the power after an instantaneous power failure, as the machine could start suddenly. (Design the machine so that personal safety can be ensured even if the machine starts suddenly.) vi
(6) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement
CAUTION
Back up the spindle amplifier parameters before starting maintenance or inspections. The capacity of the electrolytic capacitor will drop due to deterioration. To prevent secondary damage due to failures, replacing this part every five years when used under a normal environment is recommended. Contact the Service Center or Service Station for replacement. Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier during inspections. (7) Disposal
CAUTION
Handle this product as general industrial waste. If heat radiating fins are exposed on the back of the spindle amplifier, a CFC substitute is in use. These models must not be handled as general industrial waste and must always be returned to the Service Center or Service Station. Do not disassemble the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. (8) General precautions
CAUTION
To explain the details, drawings given in this manual, etc., may show the unit with the cover or safety partition removed. Always install the cover or partitions at their original position before turning the spindle motor or spindle amplifier power ON, and operate as indicated in the manual, etc.
vii
Compliance to European EC Directives

1. European EC Directives
The European EC Directives were issued to unify standards in the EU Community, and to ensure smooth distribution of products for which safety is ensured. In the EU Community, the attachment of a CE mark (CE marking) is mandatory to indicate that the basic safety conditions of the Machine directives (issued Jan. 1994), EMC Directives (issued Jan. 1996) and the Low-voltage Directives (issued Jan. 1997) are satisfied. The machines and devices in which the servo and spindle drive are assembled are a target for CE marking. The spindle drive does not function independently, and is a component designed to be used in combination with a machine or device. Thus, the spindle drive is not directly targeted by the Directives, but a CE mark must be attached to machines and devices in which it is assembled. "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES", (BNP-B8582-45) which explains the servo amplifier installation and control panel manufacturing methods, etc., have been prepared for the MDS-B/C1 Series to facilitate CE marking of the machine and device in which this product is assembled, to realize compliance with low-voltage directive related standards, and realize compliance with EMC Directives. Contact Mitsubishi or your dealer for more information.
2. Cautions for EC Directive compliance

Use the Low-voltage Directive compatible parts for the spindle drive and spindle motor. In addition to the items described in this instruction manual, observe the items described below. (1) Configuration
Control panel
Reinforced isolating transformer No-fuse breaker NFB
Electromagnetic contactor MC
Servo/ spindle drive
Motor (servo/spindle)
(2) Environment Use the spindle drive within a Pollution Class 2 or less environment as stipulated in IEC664. Install the spindle drive in control panel having a structure (IP54) which does not permit the entry of water, oil, carbon or dust, etc. (3) Power supply (a) Use the spindle drive under the Overvoltage Category II conditions stipulated in IEC664. Install a reinforced isolating transformer complying with IEC or EN Standards at the power input section.
viii
(4) Grounding (a) To prevent electric shocks, always connect the spindle amplifier protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal with mark) to the protective earth (PE) on the control panel. (Always ground even when using an earth leakage breaker.) (b) When connecting the earthing wire to the protective earth (PE) terminal, do not tighten the wire terminals together. Always connect one wire to one terminal.
PE terminal
PE terminal
(5) Wiring (a) Always use crimp terminals with insulation tubes so that the wires connected to the spindle amplifier terminal block do not contact the neighboring terminals.
Crimp terminal
Insulation tube Wire
(6) Peripheral devices and options (a) Use no-fuse breakers and magnetic contacts which comply with EN/IEC Standards. (b) Select the wire size according to EN60204. (Refer to section (8.3 7).)
(7) Miscellaneous Refer to "EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES" for methods on complying with the EMC Directives.
ix
CONTENTS
I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section 1. Outline ................................................................................................................................. I-1 1.1 Features ...................................................................................................................... I-1 1.2 Precautions for use...................................................................................................... I-2 2. System Configuration .......................................................................................................... I-3 3. Unit Installation.................................................................................................................... I-7 4. Connection of Each Unit...................................................................................................... I-9 4.1 Layout of each unit .................................................................................................... I-10 4.2 Link bar specifications ............................................................................................... I-10 4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units ............................................... I-12 4.4 Precautions when installing multiple spindle drive units to one power supply unit.... I-13 5. Connector and Cable Specifications ................................................................................. I-14 5.1 Half pitch connector and cable connection system ................................................... I-14 5.2 Cable details.............................................................................................................. I-15 5.2.1 SH21 cable (Semi-ordered part) [For B/C1-CV B/C1-SPT connection]........... I-15 5.2.2 Spindle control circuit cable list ........................................................................... I-16 5.2.3 Cable assembly procedure ................................................................................. I-21 6. Outline Drawing................................................................................................................. I-25 6.1 List of outlines............................................................................................................ I-25 6.2 Power supply unit ...................................................................................................... I-26 6.3 Spindle drive unit ....................................................................................................... I-27 6.4 AC reactor ................................................................................................................. I-28 6.5 Contactor ................................................................................................................... I-29 6.6 NFB ........................................................................................................................... I-29 7. Heating Value.................................................................................................................... I-30 8. Selection of Capacity......................................................................................................... I-31 8.1 Selection of the power supply unit (MDS-B/C1-CV) .................................................. I-31 8.2 Selection of the power supply capacity ..................................................................... I-31 8.3 Selection of wire size................................................................................................. I-32 8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB.............................................................. I-35
II. MDS-B/C1-CV Power Regeneration Type Power Supply Section 1. Power Supply Unit.............................................................................................................. II-1 1.1 Model configuration .................................................................................................... II-1 1.2 List of specifications ................................................................................................... II-2 1.3 Hardware and parameter setting ................................................................................ II-3 1.4 Status display ............................................................................................................. II-4 1.4.1 7-segment LED display ........................................................................................ II-4 1.4.2 Charge lamp......................................................................................................... II-4 1.5 List of alarms and warnings........................................................................................ II-5 1.6 Explanation of connectors and terminal block ............................................................ II-7 1.7 Functions added with MDS-B Series (Power supply external emergency stop function)...................................................... II-8 1.8 Main circuit connection ............................................................................................. II-10
III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit System Section 1. Model, Configuration and Connection ............................................................................... III-1 1.1 Model configuration ................................................................................................... III-1 1.2 Configuration ............................................................................................................. III-2 1.2.1 Basic configuration (No additional specifications) ............................................... III-2 1.2.2 With orientation function...................................................................................... III-2 1.3 Device-to-device connections.................................................................................... III-4 2. Specifications .................................................................................................................... III-5 2.1 AC spindle motor and controller specifications.......................................................... III-5 2.2 Output characteristics................................................................................................ III-9 2.3 Outline dimension drawings .................................................................................... III-11 2.3.1 Motor ................................................................................................................. III-11 3. Status Display and Parameter Settings........................................................................... III-16 3.1 Status display with 7-segment LED......................................................................... III-17 3.2 Spindle parameters ................................................................................................. III-18 3.3 Spindle specification parameters screen................................................................. III-39 3.4 Spindle monitor screen............................................................................................ III-40 3.5 Control input signals ................................................................................................ III-41 3.6 Control output signals.............................................................................................. III-43 3.7 Meter outputs........................................................................................................... III-46 3.8 Output interface ....................................................................................................... III-48 4. Optional Specifications and Parts ................................................................................... III-49 4.1 Orientation specifications (optional) ........................................................................ III-49 4.1.1 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor ........................................................ III-49 4.1.2 4096-point orientation using encoder................................................................ III-57 4.1.3 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder .......................................... III-60 4.1.4 Operation of orientation..................................................................................... III-60 4.2 Synchronous tap function (option)........................................................................... III-63 4.2.1 Closed type synchronous tap............................................................................ III-63 4.2.2 Semi-closed type synchronous tap ................................................................... III-63 4.2.3 Operation of synchronous tap ........................................................................... III-63 4.3 C-axis control (optional)........................................................................................... III-64 4.3.1 When using encoder (OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01) ................................ III-64 4.3.2 When using built-in encoder (MBE90K) ............................................................ III-67 4.3.3 When using built-in encoder (MHE90K) ............................................................ III-67 4.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts).................................................................... III-68 4.4.1 Power step-down transformer ........................................................................... III-68 4.4.2 Noise filter ......................................................................................................... III-70 4.5 Other optional specifications ................................................................................... III-72 4.6 Theoretical acceleration and deceleration times ..................................................... III-73
IV. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section 1. Starting up the System ...................................................................................................... IV-1 1.1 Startup procedures .................................................................................................... IV-1 1.2 Status display with 7-segment LED........................................................................... IV-2 2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts.............................................................................. IV-3 2.1 Replacing the unit...................................................................................................... IV-3 2.2 Unit fan ...................................................................................................................... IV-6 3. Daily Maintenance............................................................................................................. IV-7 3.1 Maintenance tools ..................................................................................................... IV-7 3.2 Periodic inspections................................................................................................... IV-7 4. Maintenance Parts ............................................................................................................ IV-9 5. Selection of Leakage Breaker ......................................................................................... IV-10 6. Noise Filter ...................................................................................................................... IV-11
xi
V. Maintenance MDS-B-CVE/MDS-C1/CV Power Supply Section 1. Troubleshooting.................................................................................................................. V-1 1.1 Status display ............................................................................................................. V-1 1.2 Troubleshooting according to power supply alarm ..................................................... V-3 1.3 Power supply warning .............................................................................................. V-12
VI. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section 1. Adjustment Procedures ..................................................................................................... VI-1 1.1 Starting up ................................................................................................................. VI-1 1.2 Confirming the speed loop......................................................................................... VI-1 1.2.2 Adjusting and confirming the motor (spindle) speed ........................................... VI-1 1.2.3 Adjusting the deceleration time ........................................................................... VI-2 1.3 Adjusting the orientation ............................................................................................ VI-2 1.3.1 Operation ............................................................................................................ VI-2 1.3.2 Operation sequence............................................................................................ VI-2 1.3.3 Encoder orientation/motor built-in encoder orientation stop position .................. VI-3 1.3.4 Diagram of orientation parameter relation........................................................... VI-4 1.3.5 Preparation for motor built-in encoder orientation adjustment ............................ VI-4 1.3.6 Preparation for encoder orientation adjustment .................................................. VI-5 1.3.7 Preparation for magnetic sensor orientation adjustment..................................... VI-6 1.3.8 Adjusting the orientation...................................................................................... VI-7 1.3.9 Adjusting the servo rigidity .................................................................................. VI-7 1.3.10 Delay/advance control and PI control................................................................ VI-8 1.3.11 Troubleshooting for orientation trouble ............................................................. VI-8 1.4 Adjusting the synchronous tap ................................................................................ VI-10 2. Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... VI-11 2.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................. VI-11 2.2 Step 1 ...................................................................................................................... VI-11 2.3 Step 2 ...................................................................................................................... VI-12 2.4 List of alarms and warnings..................................................................................... VI-15 2.5 Approach per phenomenon ..................................................................................... VI-16 2.5.1 Details when alarm or warning is displayed on the 7-segment display ............. VI-16 2.5.2 Details when alarm or warning is not displayed on 7-segment unit .................. VI-25 2.6 Periodic inspections................................................................................................. VI-28 2.6.1 Inspecting the control unit ................................................................................. VI-28 2.6.2 Inspecting the motor.......................................................................................... VI-28 3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor ...................................................................... VI-29 3.1 Disassembling and assembling the SJ type AC spindle motor ............................... VI-29 3.2 Disassembling and assembling the SJ-N type AC spindle motor............................ VI-37 4. Handling the Orientation Detector ................................................................................... VI-46 4.1 Magnetic sensor type 1-point orientation................................................................. VI-46 4.1.1 Operation of magnet and sensor....................................................................... VI-46 4.1.2 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................ VI-47 4.2 Encoder type 4096-point orientation........................................................................ VI-47 4.2.1 Configuration..................................................................................................... VI-47 4.2.2 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................ VI-47 4.3 Motor built-in encoder type 4-96-point orientation ................................................... VI-47 4.3.1 Sequences, etc. ................................................................................................ VI-47
xii
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List ..........................................................................................1 Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table ..........................................................................................1 Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications ..................................1 1. Outline.................................................................................................................................1 2. List of units ..........................................................................................................................1 3. Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB............................................................1 4. Outline of units ....................................................................................................................2 5. Panel cut dimension drawing ..............................................................................................3 6. Detailed outline drawing......................................................................................................4 7. Heating value ......................................................................................................................7 8. Selection of power capacity ................................................................................................7 9. Selecting of wire size ..........................................................................................................7 10. Drive unit connection screw size.......................................................................................8 11. Connection of Each Unit ...................................................................................................8 12. Restrictions .....................................................................................................................10 13. Parameters .....................................................................................................................11 14. Precautions .....................................................................................................................11
xiii
I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section
1. Outline
1. Outline
1.1 Features
(1) High-speed serial communication with CNC A high-speed serial communication function, compatible with the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2" has been incorporated. (2) Compact and lightweight The volume, installation area and mass have been drastically reduced with the incorporation of high density mounted electronic parts IPM (Intelligent Power Module) and the high performance heat dissipation fin. (3) Standardization of dimensions Mounting in cabinets has been made easy by unifying the height and inner-panel depth dimensions of all power supply unit and spindle drive unit capacities. (4) Low heat generation The amount of heat generated has been greatly reduced by incorporating the IPM. (5) Separable units Separable converter sections and inverter sections allows the optimum unit matching the motor characteristics to be selected. Multiple inverters can be driven with one converter to handle multi-axis machines. (6) High-speed and precision processing A high-speed CPU has been mounted to improve the cutting performance and accuracy. (7) High-speed spindle orientation Smooth operations and minimum orientation times have been realized by using the high-speed orientation method which allows direct orientation from the maximum speed. (8) Simple parameter input All parameters can be input from the personal computer allowing startup and adjustments to be completed in a short time. (9) MDS-B/V1 Series features (a) European Safety Standard compliant This system is compatible with European Safety Standards (LVD Directives). (Refer to "Compliance with European EC Directives" for details.) (Note that the target models in the B/C1 Series are limited to the CV (power regeneration power supply) and SPT (spindle drive.) (b) Addition of power supply emergency stop input line When using the B/C1 Series, if the emergency stop hot line from the NC is disabled for any reason, the external contactor can be directly cut off with from the power supply. (This function is validated with the rotary switch and connected drive's parameter settings.)
I-1
1. Outline
1.2 Precautions for use

(1) The motor rated output is guaranteed when the power supply unit's input voltage is 200VAC or more. The rated output may not be achieved if the input voltage fluctuates and drops below this level. (2) A higher harmonic chopper voltage, controlled by PWM, is applied on the motor causing a higher harmonic leakage current to flow when the motor is running. A general-purpose earth leakage breaker could malfunction due to the effect of this higher harmonic, so always use an earth leakage breaker for inverters. (3) The above higher harmonic leakage current also flows to the grounding wire between the motor and drive unit. If this grounding wire is placed near the NC's CRT screen, the CRT screen could malfunction due to the effect of the leakage current's magnetic field. Keep the grounding wire as far away from the CRT screen as possible. (4) Noise may occur in AM radio broadcasts due to the electromagnetic wave noise generated from the motor and drive unit. Separate radios and the motor and drive unit as far as possible. A filter for radio noise measures is available as an option, so use one if necessary. (5) When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as soon as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this could result in machine damage or personal injury. (6) Do not relay the speed detector or position detector cables. Doing so could result malfunctions caused by the motor power cable or noise from other devices. Any relays made are the responsibility of the user, and measures against noise must be provided.
I-2
2. System Configuration
WARNING
1. Wiring and inspection work must be done by a qualified technician. 2. Wait at least 10 minutes after turning the power OFF and LED on spindle amplifier turning OFF before starting wiring or inspections. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks. 3. Wire the spindle motor and spindle amplifier after installation. Failure to observe this could result in electric shocks. 4. Do not damage, apply forcible stress, place heavy items on the cables or get them caught. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Correctly and securely perform the wiring. Failure to do so could lead to runaway of the spindle motor, or to injuries. 2. Do not mistake the names of the terminals for connecting the cables. Failure to observe this could result in rupture or faults. Spindle amplifier 3. Do not mistake the DC voltage polarity (+, -). Failure to observe this item could lead to ruptures or damage, etc. VIN 4. Do not mistake the polarity of the noise (surge) absorption (24VDC) diode installed on the DC relay for the control output signal. The faulty signal will not be output and the spindle amplifier could fail. Control output signal 5. Electronic devices used near the spindle amplifier could be affected by the electromagnetic disturbances. Connect a noise filter, etc., on the power lead-in wire to reduce the effect of electromagnetic disturbances. (Refer to III. Spindle drive unit section 4.4.2.) 6. Do not use a phase-advancing capacitor, surge killer or noise filter on the spindle motor's power wire. 7. If a spindle motor or spindle amplifier fails, cut off the power with the fault output. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc. 8. Never modify the spindle motor or spindle amplifier. 9. Precautions for using MDS-B Series 1) The rush sequence of the power supply unit's MDS-B-CV-370 differs from other power supplies, so always install an external contactor. Do not share the contactor with other power supplies.
I-3
(1) Basic system configuration Spindle drive unit CN 1A 7 8 CN 5 6 MDS-B/C1-SPT MDS-B/C1-CV Power supply unit CN CN 4 4
NC (PC)
Link bar
L+, LL11, L21
Control power RS
MC1 U V W L1 L2 L3
Power supply RST NFB 1
ENC
Spindle motor
Contactor
AC reactor B-AL
200VAC IN
Magnetic sensor Spindle motor Spindle motor fan power supply ST
NFB 2
(Note 1) Always install the spindle drive unit next to the power supply unit. (Note 2) Wire the AC reactor to the front (NF side) of the contactor. (Note 3) Whether or not to install a contactor can be selected only for the MDS-C1-CV-300 and smaller capacities. For safety purposes, use the state with no contactor only when the system configuration ensures that problems can be avoided when trouble occurs. Set the rotary switch on the power supply unit according to whether the contactor is installed. Contactor installed : Rotary switch setting = 0 Contactor not installed : Rotary switch setting = 1 (Note 4) Always install the AC reactor. (The reactor is supplied from Mitsubishi.) (Note 5) Always install a surge killer on the contactor.
I-4
(2) List of units (a) MDS-B Series Power supply unit ..... DC power supply to drive unit/regenerative control
No. Model Capa- Mass city (kg) (kW) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 8.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 Dimensions Correspondence to drive unit capacity (MDS-B-SPT) HWD (mm) Type 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370 38060300 38060300 38060300 38090300 380120300 380120300 380150300 380150300 380150300 380150300 D1 B1 C1 A1
1 B-CVE-37 2 B-CVE-55 3 B-CVE-75 4 B-CVE-110 5 B-CVE-150 6 B-CVE-185 7 B-CVE-220 8 B-CVE-260 9 B-CVE-300 10 B-CVE-370
(b) MDS-C1 Series Power supply unit ..... DC power supply to drive unit/regenerative control
No. Model Capa- Mass city (kg) (kW) 3.7 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0 18.5 22.0 26.0 30.0 37.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 8.5 10.5 10.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 Dimensions Correspondence to drive unit capacity (MDS-B-SPT) HWD (mm) Type 04 075 15 22 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370 38060200 38060200 38060200 38090255 380120255 380120255 380150255 380150255 380150255 380150255 D2 B2 C2 A2
1 C1-CV-37 2 C1-CV-55 3 C1-CV-75 4 C1-CV-110 5 C1-CV-150 6 C1-CV-185 7 C1-CV-220 8 C1-CV-260 9 C1-CV-300 10 C1-CV-370
(Note 1) The power supply unit and spindle drive unit combination may differ from the above combinations. The power supply capacity is determined by the motor output, and the spindle drive unit capacity is determined by the motor characteristics. (Note 2) Refer to "Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications" for details on the MDS-B-CVE-450 and SPT-370, 450 and 550.
I-5
(3) List of unit dimensions Outline type A1

W: 60 (Fin section D: 120) D: 300 180
B1
C1
D1
W: 90 D: 300 Fin section: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120
W: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120
W: 150
Outline drawing (mm)
H: 380
H: 380
H: 380
H: 380
The A0 type has no fin. (Depth: 180)
Outline type
A2
W: 60 (Fin section D: 120) D: 300 180
B2
C2
D2
W: 90 D: 300 Fin section: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120
W: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120
W: 150
Outline drawing (mm)
H: 380
H: 380
H: 380
H: 380
The A0 type has no fin. (Depth: 180)
I-6
3. Unit Installation
CAUTION
1. Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Failure to observe this could result in injury. 2. Do not stack the product above the indicated limit. 3. Install the product on non-combustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible materials could result in fires. 4. When installing, always observe this manual and install on a place which can withstand the mass. 5. Do not get on the product, or place heavy objects on it. Failure to observe this could result in injury. 6. Use the product within the designated environment conditions. 7. Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such as oil enter the spindle amplifier. 8. Do not block the spindle amplifier's intake/outtake ports. Failure to observe this could result in faults. 9. The spindle amplifier is a precision device. Do not drop it or apply strong impacts. 10. Do not install or operate a spindle amplifier that is damaged or missing parts. 11. Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle amplifier for a long time. (1) Each unit is designed to be installed in a cabinet such as a power distribution box. Avoid installation in direct sunlight, near heat generating objects or outdoors. (2) The inner working environment (temperature, humidity, vibration, atmosphere) of the cabinet must be within the limits given in the "Specifications for each unit". The cabinet for the cutting machine must be a totally closed type cabinet. (3) Make considerations so that inspections and replacement during maintenance is easy. The space required around each unit's panel is shown in the outline dimension drawings. (4) Each unit generates some heat, so leave a space on the top and bottom when installing other equipment or parts. Refer to the outline drawing for the square hole dimensions. In this case, insert packing between the unit and power distribution box. Refer to the following installation examples for installing each unit.
40
160
Power distribution box 40
Power distribution box
Cover Outtake 40 Partition
40
Filter Intake
Front
Rear
Example 1.
Leave space for air flow when the power distribution box is at the rear of the machine.
Example 2.
When the outdoor air cooling section is to protrude from the power distribution box, make sure that cutting chips, etc., do not enter the outtake section.
I-7
CAUTION
1. Do not hold the front cover when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop and cause injury. 2. Always observe the installation direction. Failure to do so could result in faults. 3. Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control panel and between other devices. Failure to do so could result in faults. Note 1. Note 2. Note 3. Note 4. When installing in a poor environment (factory with high levels of oil mist), install a filter at the intake section of the partition showed with the dashed line in Example 2 above. Make sure that cutting chips from the drill, etc., do not enter the spindle amplifier when assembling the control panel. Provide means so that oil, water and cutting chips, etc., do not enter the spindle amplifier from the control panel clearances or the ceiling fan. When using the product in a place with high levels of harmful gases or dust, protect the spindle amplifier with air purging (feed in clean air from outside so that the pressure in the storage panel is higher than outside to prevent the entry of harmful gases or dust).
(5) Installation of cooling fan Each unit (excluding types without fins) is individually provided with a cooling fan (FAN1 shown below). However, when using the totally closed type unit installation method and the box structure in which cutting oil and dust, etc., easily enters the unit's fan and fin section (a structure where the fan may stop easily due to the working environment), the user should add a fan at the FAN2 position shown on the right. Carry out forced cooling with the velocity set to 2m/sec or more. Also take the serviceability into consideration in this case.
Inside box
Outside box
Wind direction
FAN1 (mounted on unit as standard) FAN2 (Additionally installed by user) * Install a finger guard for safety.
Due to the structure, heat will tend to accumulate on the top of each unit. Thus, install a fan in the power distribution box to mix the heat at the top of each unit. (Inside box) Wind direction
FAN3 (Additionally installed by user) Velocity 2m/sec or higher * Install a finger guard for safety.
Front view of units
Power supply
Spindle drive
I-8
4. Connection of Each Unit

CAUTION
1. Turn the spindle amplifier power OFF if the spindle amplifier fails. Fires could be caused if a large current continues to flow. 2. Cut off the power with the error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc. 3. Do not relay the cables connected to CN5 and 6 on the spindle drive unit with a terminal block or connector, etc. Failure to observe this could result in malfunctions or faults. 5. Always connect the motor's ground to the terminal on the spindle drive unit with a grounding wire. Directly connect the grounding for each unit to the grounding terminal on each power distribution box. (Do not pass the grounding wire through each drive unit.) Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier malfunctions or faults. 6. Always connect the external contactor for MDS-B/V1-CV-370/450/550. Do not share this connector with other CVs as damage could occur. Wire the power supply and main circuit as shown below. Always use a No fuse Breaker (NFB) on the power supply input wire. <Standard connection> The control circuit power is provided by applying the 3-phase power supply on R, S and T. After initializing for approx. one second, the machine ready input signal turns ON and enables operation. If this signal turns OFF during spindle motor operation, the base interception will be carried out, and the motor will coast (no load).
Wiring system diagram
NC (PC)
CNS20
MDS-B/C1-SPT (Spindle drive)

CN1A CN1B
MDS-B/C1-CV (Power supply)

CN4
Note 1. Starting with production in April 1995, a grounding bar has been attached to each unit before shipment. Connect the grounding wire as shown below, and do not tighten the grounding wires together.
For B/C1-SPT
CN9 CN4 CN9
U VW
For B/C1-CV
L1 L2 L3
CN6
CN5
CN6
L+ LL11 L21 MC1
U V W
U WV
Note 2. If the unit may malfunction since devices (contactor, magnetic brakes, relay) that generate high levels of noise are installed near the power supply unit and drive unit, install a surge killer on the noise generating device, so as to suppress the noise.
CN7
CN8
(Magnetic sensor)
(Contactor)
MC
A/BAL (AC reactor) (Encoder) (Spindle motor) T 3 S 200VAC R 200 to 230VAC 60Hz
I-9
4.1 Layout of each unit

Layout the units according to the following reference as a principle. (1) When installing one spindle drive Spindle Power drive supply Link bar
(Front) (2) When installing two spindle drives (a) When the total spindle drive output is 37kW or less Spindle Power Spindle drive supply drive Link bar
(Front) (b) When the total spindle drive output exceeds 37kW Spindle Power Spindle Power drive supply drive supply (1) (1) (2) (2)
(Front)
Link bar
(Note 1) Install each unit next to each other (vertical direction is not acceptable) with a 3cm or less clearance between each unit. Note that this does not apply to the spindle drives (2) and power supply units (1) shown in (b) of section (2). (Note 2) When using section (2) (b), install an ACL (A/B-AL) on each power supply unit.
4.2 Link bar specifications

The link bar is the following part, and must be manufactured by the user: L+, L- A connection wire used to supply the converter's DC voltage from the power supply unit to each drive unit. L11, L21 A connection wire used to supply the 200VAC control power to each unit. This does not necessary need to be a bar (plate), but can be a wire. Link bar specifications The terminal block for link bar connection is the following regardless of the capacity: L+, L- M6 screw L11, L21 M4 screw
I - 10
An outline connection diagram is shown below for reference. (1) Outline connection drawing
SPT B/C1-CV
(Note) Mount the terminal cover after wiring as shown on the left. The terminal cover differs for each unit width. Refer to section "8.3 Selection of wire size".
N RO SO
I - 11
4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units

The methods for installing the two-axis spindles are explained here as an example for installing the power supply unit.
NC(PC) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-B/C1-CV(No.1) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2) MDS-A/B-CV(No.2)
C N 1A 1B 9 5 6 7 8
C N 4
C N 4 MC1 L+, LL11, L21 L1, L2, L3
C N 1A 1B 9 5 6 7 8
C N 4
C N 4 MC1 L+, LL11, L21 L1, L2, L3
AC reactor (A/B-AL NO.1) MC
200VAC AC reactor (A/B-AL NO.2)
Contactor NFB1
Fig. 1 1) Connecting the L+, L-, L11 and L21 link bars Connect the L+ and L- link bars independently with A/B-CV (No. 1) and A/B-CV (No. 2) as shown above. Make sure that both A/B-CV link bars are not short-circuited and connected. Note that the L11 and L21 link bars can be connected together. 2) Connecting and selecting NFB1, contactor and AC reactor The NFB1 and contactor can be shared as shown above. Note that when using the B-CV-370, the rush circuit and contactor operation sequence differ, so the contactor must be installed independently. (The contactor cannot be shared.) Damage will result if the contactor is omitted, or if it shared with the other power supplies. The AC reactors must be installed separately for the A/B-CV (No. 1) and (No. 2). 3) Connecting the MC1 terminal (A/B-CV) When sharing the contactor as shown above, connect the terminal (MC1) for exciting the contactor coil to one of the A/B-CV connections. Set the A/B-CV rotary switch to which MC1 is connected to "0", and set the other switch to "1".
I - 12
4.4 Precautions when installing multiple spindle drive units to one power supply unit
The methods for installing two spindle drive units to one power supply unit are explained here as an example.
NC(PC) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-A/B-CV MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2)
C N 1A 1B 9 5 6 7 8
C N 4
C N 4 C N 9 MC1
C N 1A 1B 9 5 6 7 8
C N 4
L+, LL11, L21
MC
200VAC AC reactor (A/B-AL)
Contactor
NFB1
Fig. 2 1) Connecting B-CVE/C1-CV and B/C1-SPT Connect B-CVE/C1-CV CN4 and B/C1-SPT (No. 1) CN4 to B-CVE/C1-CV CN9 and B/C1-SPT (No. 2) CN4. If B/C1-SPT for three or more axes is connected, leave CN4 for B/C1-SPT (No. 3) and following open. Note that the A/B-CV can be controlled (READY ON/OFF, alarm display, etc.) only with the spindle drive unit connected to A/B-CV CN4. Make sure that the machine ready input turns ON and OFF simultaneously for all spindle drive units. Do not allow the signal to turn ON and OFF for only one spindle drive unit. When turning the machine relay input OFF during an emergency stop, always output the zero speed signal with all spindle drive units before turning the signal OFF. If an alarm occurs in one of the spindle drive units, turn OFF the machine ready input OFF for all spindle drive units. When connecting three or more spindle drive units, install the large-capacity drive units on both sides of the power supply unit.
2) 3) 4) 5)
I - 13
5. Connectioor
5. Connector and Cable Specifications

5.1 Half pitch connector and cable connection system
NC (PC) MDS-B/C1-SPT SH21 cable MDS-B/C1-CV
CN1A 7 8
CN4
CN4 9
Detector
Cable name
SH21 cable
Connector name Recommended connector Cable materials on controller on cable side (Maker) (Maker) side (Maker) 10220-L8A9VE Shell (Crimp type): 10320-3210-000 (3M) UL2789 AWG28 (3M) (DDK) Plug (Pressure welding type): 10120-6000EL (3M) 10PVV-SB AWG2810P (3M)
Cable creation tool (Maker)
Press machine unit (with gage block) : 3794-1000 Locator plate : 3795-1A Platen : 3795-2A Cutting unit : 3795-3A Fixture unit : 3796-1A Fixture unit : 3796-2A Fixture unit : 3796-5A Fixture block : 3796-3A Cable clamp : 3796-4
CNP5 cable
Same as above
CNP6M cable CNP6A cable
Same as above
CN8A, Same as above 10, 11, 12 cable
(1) Controller side Plug (soldered-type): 10120-3000VE (3M) Shell (soldered-type): 10320-52F0-008 (3M) (2) Detector side Connector: AMP-350720-1 (AMP) Pin: AMP-350689-1 (AMP) (1) Controller side Same as above (2) Detector side (a) Magnetic sensor TRC116-12A10-7F10.5 (Tajimi Musen) (b) Encoder MS3106A20-29S (Canon) (1) Controller side Same as above
TS-91026 2P0.3SQ +10P0.2SQ (DDK)
Same as above
I - 14
5. Connectioor
5.2 Cable details

5.2.1 SH21 cable (Semi-ordered part) [For B/C1-CV B/C1-SPT connection]
Part No. Part name 000 101 Connector (plastic shell) 102 Cable 103 Connector (plug) Model Maker
10320-3210-000 10PVV-SB AWG2810P (BK0-NC9072) 10120-6000EL
3M 3M 3M
103 11 1
101
102
101 103
12
10 350 (Standard)
Fix shield onto connector case
Fix shield onto connector case
I - 15
5. Connectioor
5.2.2 Spindle control circuit cable list

Arranged by Drive unit side connection connector Connected device Cable name Parts name Maker Connected device Applicable cable finished state Parts name Maker Arranged by
No.
Application
Motor temperature switch signal (1) Motor speed detection signal CN5 CNP5 cable
Spindle drive unit (Shell) 10320-52F0-008 (Plug) 10120-3000VE 3M Spindle drive unit
Orientation (2) detection signal (Magnetic sensor)
CN6
(Shell) CNP6M 10320-52F0-008 cable (Plug) 10120-3000VE 3M Spindle drive unit
Maximum diameter 11mm TRC116-12A0-7F 10.5
Tajimi Musen Twisted pair batch shield cable 0.2SQ Maximum diameter 11mm MS3106A20-29S Encoder
Orientation (3) detection signal (Encoder)
CN6
(Shell) CNP6A 10320-52F0-008 (Plug) cable 10120-3000VE 3M Spindle drive unit (Connector) 54306-2611 (Clamp) 54331-0261 MOLEX Spindle drive unit (Shell) 10320-52F0-008 (Plug) 10120-3000VE 3M
DDK Batch vinyl shield cable NC (PC) 0.2SQ x 20-core Maximum diameter 11mm
(4) Communication
CN1A CN7
CN1 cable CN7 cable
Toshiba Machine ordered part
No ordered part
Twisted pair shield cable 0.3SQ5 Maximum diameter 11mm
NC (PC)
Digital speed (5) command pulse feedback
CN9A
CN9A cable
No ordered part
Spindle drive unit CN9A cable (Shell) 10320-52F0-008 (Plug) 10120-3000VE 3M
Twisted pair shield cable 0.3SQ2 Maximum diameter 11mm
NC (PC) Speedometer Load meter
(6) Meter output
CN9A
Twisted pair shield cable 0.3SQ Personal computer RS232C Maximum diameter 11mm connector
(7)
Personal computer for parameter input monitor
CN9A
CN9B cable
(Shell) 10320-52F0-008 (Plug) 10120-3000VE 3M
I - 16
No ordered part
Spindle drive unit
Enclosed with encoder
Semi ordered part
Enclosed with magnetic sensor drive unit
Semi ordered part
Motor (connector) Motor (lead wire terminal) Maximum diameter 11mm (Connector) AMP-350720-1 (Pin) AMP-350689-1 Japan Amplifier Magnetic sensor Twisted pair batch shield cable drive unit 0.2SQ Twisted pair batch shield cable 0.2SQ
Enclosed with motor
Semi ordered part
5. Connectioor
(Note 1) The connector shell on the spindle drive unit is the 3M "10320-52F0-008", but this is a shell with a one-touch locking mechanism that does not require screw locking. When ordering the cables from Mitsubishi, this shell will be used. However, if the cable is to be manufactured by the user, the shell "10320-52A0-008" (3M) with the screw lock mechanism can be used instead of the above shell. (Note 2) Keep the length of the cables, excluding the CN9B cable to 30m or less. (The CN9B cable must be 3m or less.) (Note 3) Do not relay the CNP5, CNP6M or CNP6A cables. Malfunctions could occur due to noise from the motor drive wire or other cables. (Orientation position could dislocate, vibration could occur, etc.) If the cable must be relayed, keep the peeled shield section as short as possible (3cm or less), and separate the cable from the other drive wires and cables. Mitsubishi will not be held liable for any problems that should occur as a result of a relayed cable. The customer is responsible for providing measures against noise.
I - 17
5. Connectioor
(1) CNP5 cable Part No. 000 101 102 103 104 105 106 Cable Connector (housing) Connector (pin) Cable name CNP5--
Connector type Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) E: E-type (crimp terminal on lead end) 2: 2-type (designated connector) 1:1-axis | | System No. 8: 8-axis None: 1-axis system 2: 2-axis system P: PLC axis Connection connector No.
Part name Connector (shell) Connector (plug)
Abbr. CON CON SEN CON CON
Model 10320-52F0-008 10120-3000VE F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) 350720-1 350689-1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8
Qty/type E-type 2-type
Length L (L 30m)
2-type
(CN5) Amplifier connector

Pin No. Green White Purple White Yellow Brown Red Brown
Detector connector
Pin No.
E-type
Blue Black
Fix ground plate to connector case
I - 18
5. Connectioor
(2) CNP6M cable Part No. 000 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Cable name CNP6M--
Connector type E: E-type (crimp terminal on lead end) 2: 2-type (designated connector) Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) 1:1-axis | | System No. 8: 8-axis None: 1-axis system Magnet sensor signal 2: 2-axis system P: PLC axis Connection connector No.
Part name Connector (shell) Connector (plug) Cable Connector
Abbr. CON CON SEN CON
Model 10320-52F0-008 10120-3000VE F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) TRC116-12A10-7F10.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Qty/type E-type 2-type

Pin No. Green White Blue Brown Purple Brown
Detector connector
Pin No.
Length L (L 30m)
2-type
E-type
I - 19
5. Connectioor
(3) CNP6A cable Part No. Part name 000 101 Connector (shell) 102 Connector (plug) 103 104 Cable Cannon connector 105 (angle) 106 Connector clamp 107 Cannon connector 108 (straight) Cable name CNP6A--
Connector type E: E-type (crimp terminal on lead end) 2: 2-type (cannon plug straight type) 3: 3-type (cannon plug L type) Axis No. (Axis 1 to 8) 1:1-axis | | System No. 8: 8-axis Encoder signal (1024P) None: 1-axis system 2: 2-axis system Connection connector No. P: PLC axis
Abbr. CON CON SEN CON CON CON
Model 10320-52F0-008 10120-3000VE F-DPEVSB TS-91026 (DDK) MS3108B20-29S MS3057-12A MS3106B20-29S
Qty/type E-type 2-type 3-type 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2-type Length L (L 30m)
3-type
Key way position
E-type

Pin No. Green White Purple White Yellow Brown Red Brown Purple Brown Blue Black
Detector connector
Pin No.
I - 20
5. Connectioor
5.2.3 Cable assembly procedure

(1) Non-shield shell assembly procedure I One-touch locking type (a) Peel the outer sheath so that the shield wires are exposed.
Shield wire
(b)
Wrap copper tape or vinyl tape around part of the shield wire section.
Copper tape
(c)
Fold the shield wire over the wrapped copper tape or vinyl tape.
Folded shield wire
(d)
Cut off any excess sheath.
Folded shield wire
(e)
Cable clamp with grounding plate
After connecting the connector and cable, mount the cable clamp approx. 1 to 2mm from the cable end, and tighten the screw until the cable clamp screw section face contacts closely. (Note) Adjust the No. of copper tape windings in step (b) so that the shield wire and clamp contact without looseness and so that the clamp's screw section face is closely contacted.
I - 21
5. Connectioor
(f)
Latch
Store a connector and latch at the respective positions on one end of the shell. (The male of the shell is same shape as female's, so store on either side.) (Note) Make sure that the cable does not rise up or exceed the shell's inner wall to prevent breakage of the cable.
(g)
Set the other shell and tighten with a screw. (Note) Recommended screw tightening torque: 3kgfcm
(h)
Completion Confirmation items : There is no clearance on the shell engaging face. The latch can be correctly opened and closed when moved with a finger.
I - 22
5. Connectioor
(2) Non-shield shell assembly procedure II Jack screw (screw locking) type (a) Peel the outer sheath so that the shield wires are exposed.
Shield wire
(b)
Wrap copper tape or vinyl tape around part of the shield wire section.
Copper tape
(c)
Fold the shield wire over the wrapped copper tape or vinyl tape.
Folded shield wire
(d)
Cut off any excess sheath.
Folded shield wire
(e)
Cable clamp with grounding plate
After connecting the connector and cable, mount the cable clamp approx. 1 to 2mm from the cable end, and tighten the screw until the cable clamp screw section face contacts closely. (Note) Adjust the No. of copper tape windings in step (b) so that the shield wire and clamp contact without looseness and so that the clamp's screw section face is closely contacted.
I - 23
5. Connectioor
(f)
Jack screw
Store a connector and jack screw at the respective positions on one end of the shell. (The male of the shell is same shape as female's, so store on either side.) (Note) Make sure that the cable does not rise up or exceed the shell's inner wall to prevent breakage of the cable.
(g)
Set the other shell and tighten with a screw. (Note) Recommended screw tightening torque: 3kgfcm
(h)
Completion Confirmation items : There is no clearance on the shell engaging face.
I - 24
6. Outline Drawing
6. Outline Drawing
6.1 List of outlines
Outline (1) Unit type
2-5 screw 2-5 screw 4-5 screw
Square hole
Square hole
(Front) (Installation) (Installation) (Installation)
[Power supply unit]
[Spindle drive unit]
Inside box
Outside box
Inside box
Outside box
Regenerative resistor
Fin and fan
Power supply unit
Spindle drive unit
Maintenance area
Maintenance area
(Side)
(Side) (Note) The type A0 unit shown in sections 2(2) and (3) does not have the fins and fin section.
Power supply unit Capacity v b c d ~ 7.5kW 60 360 52 342 11kW 90 360 82 342 15 to 18.5kW 120 360 112 342 22 to 37kW 150 360 142 342 ~ 3.7kW 60 360 52 342
Spindle drive unit 5.5 to 11kW 90 360 82 342 15 to 18.5kW 120 360 112 342 22 to 30kW 150 360 142 342
I - 25
Fin and fan
Square hole
6. Outline Drawing
6.2 Power supply unit

Square hole
B/C1-CV-37 55 75 B/C1-CV-10 B/C1-CV-150 185

Unit width -8
2-M5 screw
Installation hole dimensions
2-6 hole
2-6 hole
2-6 hole
Wiring space
B/C1-CV-220 260 300 B/C1-CV-370

Square hole
Terminal cover
4-M5 screw
4-6 hole
Wiring space
Terminal cover
I - 26
6. Outline Drawing
6.3 Spindle drive unit

(Note) The front view drawing shows the state with the terminal cover removed.
Unit width -8
Square hole
2-M5 screw
2-6 hole
2-6 hole
2-6 hole
Wiring space
(Note) The front view drawing shows the state with the terminal cover removed.
Terminal cover
Square hole
4-M5 screw
4-6 hole
Wiring space
Terminal cover
I - 27
6. Outline Drawing
6.4 AC reactor
(1) Conventional product (production discontinued) AC reactor outline drawing (1) For 30kW or less
Y31 551 4-610 slot 1652

Y3 82 75 105 110
6-M6 screw
Terminal cover
ACL model A-AL BKO-NC6851H01 A-AL BKO-NC6851H02 A-AL BKO-NC6851H03 A-AL BKO-NC6851H04
110
140
Y 130 120 140 150
Y
Mass 3.6kg 3.0kg 5.2kg 6.0kg
Corresponding power supply unit
A-CV-37, A-CV-55, A-CV-75 A-CV-110 A-CV-150, A-CV-185 A-CV-220, A-CV-260, A-CV-300
(2) European Standards compliant part AC reactor outline drawing (1) For 30kW or less AC reactor outline drawing
(1) 37kW
M5 screw FG connection position (With ground mark) PE connection postiion Terminal cover
L31 L32
Y31 175
6-M6 screw
MAIN L11 L12 DRIVE
L21 L22
M5 screw FG connection position (With ground mark) PE connection postiion Terminal cover
551
701 4-815 slot
4-815 slot
155
125
1652
145
2202
ACL model Corresponding power supply unit B-AL-7.5K B/C1-CV-37,B/C1-CV-55,B/C1-CV-75 B-AL-11K B/C1-CV-110 B-AL-18.5K B/C1-CV-150, B/C1-CV-185 B/C1-CV-220,B/C1-CV-260,B/C1-CV-300 B-AL-30K
Y3 82 75 105 110
Y 130 130 140 150
Mass Screw
3.6kg 3.0kg 5.2kg 6.0kg
M5 M6
ACL model B-AL-37K
Corresponding power supply unit
B/C1-CV-370
Y3 Y 110 150
I - 28
6-M6 screw
MAIN L11 L12 DRIVE
Y31
L21 L22
L31 L32
Mass 10.0kg
6. Outline Drawing
(Note 1) This AC reactor has a PE (protection grounding) terminal for electric shock prevention and an FG (function grounding) terminal for noise measures. Observe the following cautions for treating each terminal. (1) PE terminal ( ) (a) When AC reactor installation side is PE Install the AC reactor unit with screws (bolts) in all four installation holes. Always insert a loosening-prevention washer and spring washer in the screw (bolt) used for the mark installation hole, and tighten the screw. (b) When AC reactor installation side is not PE Install the AC reactor unit with screws (bolts) in all four installation holes. Always insert a loosening-prevention washer and spring washer and tighten the mark screw together with the grounding wire (PE) crimp terminal at the installation hole. The grounding wire used is the same type as the grounding wire connected to the power supply unit. (2) FG terminal (FG) Screw the function grounding wire crimp terminal at the terminal marked as "FG" on the top of the AC reactor (terminal block). (With this treatment, the built-in filter's grounding will be directly connected to the grounding, and the noise withstand level will be improved.) Function grounding wire: This is a grounding wire not used for protection grounding. Thus, do not use a green/yellow spiral wire. (Note 2) The dimensions of the terminal cover are as shown on the right. When separately manufacturing a cover, refer to the dimensions on the right.
6.5 Contactor
Refer to the section "8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB".
6.6 NFB
Refer to the section "8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB".
I - 29
7. Heating Value
7. Heating Value
1) Power supply unit (MDA-B/C1-CV) Model Heating value (W) B Series C1 Series 2) Spindle drive unit (MDS-B/C1-SPT) Model Heating value (W) B Series C1 Series
CV-37 CV-55 CV-75 CV-110 CV-150 CV-185 CV-220 CV-260 CV-300 CV-370
55 65 80 130 160 200 220 270 330 -
55 65 80 125 155 195 210 260 320 400
SPT-04 SPT-075 SPT-15 SPT-22 SPT-37 SPT-55 SPT-75 SPT-110 SPT-150 SPT-185 SPT-220 SPT-260 SPT-300
*30 *40 *50 70 80 110 140 185 240 350 375 495 635
(Note 1) The heating value for the spindle drive unit is for during continuous rated output. (Note 2) For the total heating value for the unit, add the heating value for the corresponding unit above that is mounted on the actual machine. Example 1) When mounted unit is B-CV-300, B/C1-SPT-150 2 units Total unit heating value (W) = 380 + 250 + 250 = 830 (W) Example 2) When mounted unit is B-CV-110, B-SPT-110 Total unit heating value (W) = 125 + 185 = 310 (W) (Note 3) Use the following expression as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when using a sealed installation. (1) Power supply unit ... Heating value outside panel = (B-CV heating value - 17) 0.8, (C1-CV heating value -15) 0.85 (2) Spindle drive unit ... Heating value outside panel = (B-SPT heating value - 20) 0.8, (C1-SPT heating value -20) 0.85 Note that units in the above table indicated with an asterisk do not have fins, so this expression does not apply. Only the heating value inside the panel applies in this case. (Note 4) Due to the structure, heat will tend to accumulate that the top of each unit. Thus, install a fan in the distribution box to mix the heat at the top of each unit.
(Inside box)
Wind direction
FAN3 (Additionally installed by user) Velocity 2m/sec or more * Install a finger guard for safety.
Power supply Spindle drive
Front view of units I - 30
8. Selection of Capacity
8.1 Selection of the power supply unit (MDS-B/C1-CV)
Select the power supply unit with the following reference.
1) When using the 1-axis spindle drive unit
Power supply unit capacity Spindle motor 30-minute rated output

2) When using two or more axis spindle drive units
Power supply unit capacity (Spindle motor 30-minute rated output)

(Note 1) (Spindle motor 30-minute rated output) is the total of the spindle motor 30-minute rating (kW). Thus, the motor output and spindle drive unit capacity will not always match so always substitute the motor output in the above equations. Furthermore, the motor output differs for the acceleration/deceleration and constant speeds, so substitute the larger output. (Note 2) The power supply capacity is the minimum line up capacity that establishes the above equations. Example) If the value obtained with the above equation is 13kW, select the 15kW capacity (B/C1-CV-150) power supply unit. (Note 3) When the power supply unit capacity is 18.5kW or less, if the value obtained on the right of the above equation is within 0.5kW or less compared to the power supply unit in the line up, the excess amount can be ignored when selecting the power supply capacity. In the same manner, if the power supply unit capacity is 22kW or more, an excess of 1kW or less can be ignored. Example 1) When value obtained on right of above equation is 15.5kW ... Power supply unit capacity = 15kW (B/C1-CV-150) Example 2) When value obtained on right of above equation is 15.6kW ... Power supply unit capacity = 18.5kW (B/C1-CV-185) Example 3) When value obtained on right of above equation is 23.0kW ... Power supply unit capacity = 22kW (B/C1-CV-220) Example 4) When value obtained on right of above equation is 23.1kW ... Power supply unit capacity = 26kW (B/C1-CV-260) (Note 4) If the value obtained on the right of the above equation exceeds 38kW, select the power supply units with a combination that does not exceed this value. Example) When using three axes and the spindle motor capacities are 26kW, 15kW and 7.5kW respectively: Power supply unit (No. 1) capacity is 26kW, and connected spindle drive unit is for 26kW motor Power supply unit (No. 2) capacity is 22kW, and connected spindle drive unit is for 15kW and 7.5kW motors
8.2 Selection of the power supply capacity

The power supply capacity reference values corresponding to the capacity of the power supply unit selected in section 8.1 are shown below.
Power supply unit B/C1-CV Power supply capacity reference values (kVA) 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
12
17
23
28
33
37
44
54
I - 31
The actually required power supply capacity is calculated with the following equation based on the above power supply capacity reference values.
Power supply capacity (kVA) = Right value (kW) obtained in equation in section 8.1 Power supply unit capacity (kW) selected from section 8.1 Power supply capacity reference value (KVA)
When using multiple power supply units, the total of the power supply capacity for each power supply unit obtained with the above equation will be the total power supply capacity. Example) When the right value obtained in section 8.1 is 13kW: The A/B-CV-150 power supply unit is selected, so the power supply capacity reference value (kVA) is 23. Thus, based on the above equation, the power supply capacity (kVA) is (13/15) 23 = 19.9 (kVA).
8.3 Selection of wire size

(1) Recommended power lead-in wire size (Select the size of the grounding wire on the power supply lead-in side with the same reference.)
The wire is selected based on the power supply unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Power supply unit B/C1-CV Recommended power lead-in wire size 37 55 75 HIV5.5 SQ 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ or or HIV2SQ HIV3.5SQ
IV14SQ IV22SQ IV30SQ IV38SQ IV50SQ IV60SQ or or or or or or HIV50SQ HIV14SQ HIV14SQ HIV22SQ HIV30SQ HIV38SQ HIV38SQ
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire (Select the size of the grounding wire on the spindle motor side with the same reference.)
The wire is selected based on the spindle drive unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Spindle drive unit Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire C1-SPT-04 IV2SQ or HIV2SQ C1-SPT-075 IV2SQ or HIV2SQ C1-SPT-15 IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ C1-SPT-22 IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ C1-SPT-37 IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ C1-SPT-55 IV3.5SQ or HIV2SQ C1-SPT-75 IV5.5SQ or HIV3.5SQ
C1-SPT-110 IV8SQ or HIV5.5SQ
C1-SPT-150 IV14SQ or HIV14SQ
(Note) The wire sizes recommended in (1) to (2) above are selected with conditions of an ambient temperature of 30C and wiring three same tubes. During actual use, select the wire based on the above reference while considering the ambient temperature, wire material, and wiring state. (3) Wire size for L11, L21 link bar
Regardless of the power supply unit and spindle drive unit capacity, the wire size must be IV2SQ or L11 and L21 must also be IV2SQ or more. more. The wire between NFB
I - 32
(4) Wire size for L+, L link bar [Selection method 1] To unify the L+ and L link bar size: In this case, select the following size or larger for the L+ and L link bars connected to the same power supply unit based on the power supply unit capacity.
Power supply unit B/C1-CV 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
Recommended IV5.5SQ IV14SQ IV22SQ IV22SQ IV38SQ IV60SQ IV60SQ IV3.5SQ IV3.5SQ IV14SQ wire size for L+ or or or or or or or or HIV2SQ or HIV2SQ or HIV8SQ and L link bar HIV3.5SQ HIV14SQ HIV14SQ HIV14SQ HIV22SQ HIV38SQ HIV50SQ
[Selection method 2] To suppress the L+ and L link bar size to the minimum required for each unit: In this case, select as shown below based on the current value that actually flows to the link bar. In this section, the case when three spindle drive units are connected to one power supply unit is explained. The same selection methods apply in all other cases.
MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.1) MDS-B/C1-SPT(No.2) MDS-B/C1-CV MDS-B/C1-SPT (No.3)
L+, L Link bar
Bar1
Bar2
Bar3
I1
I2
I3
(a) If the current which flows through the L+ and L- bus bars of each drive unit is 11 to 13 as shown above, the current that flows through each link bar (Bar1 to Bar3) is as follows: I (Bar 1) = I1 I (Bar 2) = I1 + I2 I (Bar 3) = I3 Thus, the wire for each L+, L link bar should tolerate the above current as a minimum. (b) The I1 to I3 values are actually obtained with the following equation: (I1 to I4) = Motor output current 1.1 Here, the motor output current in the above equation is the following value in correspondence to the spindle drive unit.
Spindle drive unit MDS-B/C1-SPTMotor output current (A) 04 4 075 6 15 10 22 17 37 25 55 30 75 40 110 60 150 74 185 94 220 103 260 127 300 165
(c) Obtain I (Bar1) to I (Bar3) using the equations in the previous section based on I1 to I3 obtained with the above equation. Match that value against the following table, and select the IV wire size.
Wire size IV2SQ IV3.5SQ IV5.5SQ IV8SQ IV14SQ IV22SQ IV38SQ IV60SQ Tolerable current 27A 37A 49A 61A 88A 115A 162A 217A
Ambient temperature (30C or less)

I - 33
(d) A selection example is shown below.

Spindle drive unit NO.1 B/C1-SPT-55 NO.2 B/C1-SPT-75 NO.3 B/C1-SPT-150 Motor SJ-5.5A SJ-7.5A SJ-15A Motor output current 30A 40A 74A
When I1 = 30A 1.1 = 33A I2 = 40A 1.1 = 44A I3 = 74A 1.1 = 81.4A Thus, I (Bar1) = I1 = 33A I (Bar2) = I1 + I2 = 77A I (Bar3) = I3 = 81.4A Therefore, the following is selected according to the table in (c): Bar1 ....... IV3.5SQ * In this case, the power supply unit Bar2 ....... IV14SQ capacity is 5.5 + 7.5 + 15 = 28kW Bar3 ....... IV14SQ
(5) Drive unit connection screw size
according to the equation in section 8.1, so select MDS-B/C1-CV-300.
The screw size for each unit is as follows.

Power supply unit MDS-B /C1-CV Capacity (kW) Unit width R, S, T, G U, V, W, G P, N R0, S0 MC1 ~ 7.5 60 M4 M6 M4 M4 11 90 M5 M6 M4 M4 15 to 18.5 120 M5 M6 M4 M4 22 to 37 150 M8 M6 M4 M4 ~ 3.7 60 M4 M6 M4 Spindle drive unit MDS-C1-SPT 5.5 to 11 90 M5 M6 M4 15 to 18.5 120 M5 M6 M4 22 to 30 150 M8 M6 M4 -
(6) Select the wire size as follows for EC Directives compliance. (The sizes are all mm2 units.) The wire types are as follows.
PVC : Polyvinyl chloride EPR : Ethylene polypropylene SIR : Silicone rubber (a) MDS-B/C1-CV (L1, L2, L3, PE)
Unit PVC Wire EPR SIR Terminal screw size 37 2.5 1.5 1.0 55 2.5 2.5 1.5 M4 75 4 4 2.5 110 6 6 4 150 10 10 6 M5 185 16 16 10 220 25 25 16 260 35 35 16 M8 300 50 35 25 370 70 50 25
(b) MDS-C1-SPT (U, V, W, PE)

Unit PVC Wire EPR SIR Terminal screw size 0.1 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.75 1.0 1.0 1.0 15 1.0 1.0 1.0 M4 22 1.0 1.0 1.0 37 1.5 1.5 1.0 55 2.5 2.5 1.0 75 4 4 2.5 110 6 6 4 M5 150 10 10 6 185 16 16 10 220 25 25 10 260 35 35 16 M8 300 70 50 25
(c) Wire size for L11 and L21 link bar Regardless of the capacity, the wire size must be 1.5mm2 or more. (This also applies to the wire between NFB-L11 and L21.)
I - 34
(d) Wire size for L+ and L link bar (for size unification)
Power supply unit B/C1-CVPVC Wire EPR SIR Terminal screw size 37 2.5 1.5 1.0 55 2.5 2.5 1.5 75 6 4 2.5 110 10 10 4 150 16 16 10 M6 185 25 25 10 220 35 35 16 260 50 35 25 300 70 70 35 370 70 35
The above wire sizes follow EN60204 under the following conditions. Ambient temperature: 40C Wire installed on wall or open cable tray When using under other conditions, refer to table 5 of EN60204 and Appendix C.
8.4 Selection of AC reactor, contactor and NFB

(a) Select the AC reactor, contactor and NFB from the following table when using only one power supply unit.
Power supply unit capacity AC reactor (ordered part) To 7.5kW B-AL-7.5K (Mitsubishi Electric) Refer to section "6. Outline Drawing" for the dimensions. S-N25-AC200V (Mitsubishi Electric) Refer to section "6. Outline Drawing" for the dimensions. NF50CS3P-40A05 (Mitsubishi Electric) Refer to section "6. Outline Drawing" for the dimensions. 11kW B-AL-11K 15 to 18.5kW B-AL-18.5K 22 to 30kW B-AL-30K 37kW B-AL-37K
Recommended contactor (non-ordered part) Recommended NFB1 (non-ordered part) Recommended NFB2 (non-ordered part)
S-N35-AC200V
S-N50-AC200V
S-N80-AC200V
S-N150-AC200V
NF50CS3P-50A05
NF100CS3P100A05
NF225CS3P150A05
NF225CS3P175A05
A NFB or CP (circuit protector) can be used as the breaker for the spindle motor fan. Select the NFB or CP by doubling the spindle motor fan rated current value as a guideline. Contact the NFB or CP maker for the recommended wire size. Spindle motor frame size Motor fan rated current 71 0.1A 90 0.2A 112 0.2A 132 0.2A 160 0.6A 180 0.6A
A rush current that is approximately double the above rated current will flow when the fan is started.
(Note 1) The following applies to the above table: Ordered parts refer to parts ordered by the user and shipped from Mitsubishi. Non-ordered parts refer to parts not ordered, but arranged by the user. (Note 2) Use the EN/IEC Standards compliant parts for the contactor and NFB to comply with the EC Directives.
(b) The power supply unit input currents are shown below for reference.
Power supply unit type B/C1-CVInput current (A) 37 20 55 30 75 40 110 60 150 70 185 80 220 100 260 120 300 135 370 160
Always install one NFB, AC reactor and contactor for each power supply unit. Note that the contactor can be omitted except for the B-CV-370 and larger capacities. (Always install a contactor for the B-CV-370 and larger capacities.)
I - 35
[Reference for contactor selection] Mitsubishi Electric contactor

AC operation AC electromagnetic contactor
AC Class 3 rated Support contact Rated working current (A) conductivity 200 to 380 to current (A) Standard Special 220V 440V 11 7 20 1a 1b 13 9 20 1a 1b 13 9 20 1a1b 2a 18 13 25 20 20 32 1a1b 2a 20 20 32 2a2b 26 25 50 2a2b 35 32 60 2a2b 50 48 80 2a2b 65 65 100 2a2b 80 80 135 2a2b 4a4b 100 93 150 2a2b 4a4b 125 120 150 2a2b 4a4b 150 150 200 2a2b 4a4b 180 180 260 2a2b 4a4b 220 220 260 2a2b 4a4b 300 300 350 2a2b 4a4b 400 400 450 2a2b 4a4b 630 630(800) 660 2a2b 4a4b 800 800(1000) 800 2a2b 4a4b Dimensions (mm) A 43 43 53 43 63 63 75 75 88 88 100 100 100 120 138 138 163 163 290 290 B 78 78 78 79 81 81 89 89 106 106 124 124 150 160 204 204 243 243 310 310 C 78 78 78 81 81 81 91 91 106 106 127 127 136 145 174 174 195 195 234 234
Name
Model
Open type Non-reversible type
S-N10 S-N11 S-N12 S-N18 S-N20 S-N21 S-N25 S-N35 S-N50 S-N65 S-N80 S-N95 S-N125 S-N150 S-N180 S-N220 S-N300 S-N400 S-N600 S-N800
(Note 1) The values given in parentheses for each rated conductivity current apply when the working ambient temperature is 40C or less.
S-N21 type
I - 36
[Reference for NFB selection] NFB made by Mitsubishi Electric Frame A Model 30 NF30-CB 50 NF50-CS 60 NF60-CS 100 NF100-CS 225 NF225-CS 400 NF400-CS 600 NF600-CS 800 NF800-CS
Appearance
Rated current (A) Reference ambient temp.
40C for general use 45C for general use
3 5 10 15 20 30
10 15 20 30 40 50
(10) (15) (20) (30) (40) (50) 60 (Note 2) 2 600

(Note 1)
(50) 60 75 100
(Note 3) (100) 125 150 175 200 225 2 600

(Note 1)
250 300 350 400
500 600
Adjustable 600 700 800 3 600 18 35 50 18 35 35 50 35 50 210 275 103 155 10.9
No. of poles AC Rated voltage V DC JIS (sym)

IEC157-1
2 250 2.5 2.5 2.5 45
2 600
(Note 1)
2 600
(Note 1)
2 600
3 600 (Note 1) 250 18 35 50 20 18 35 35 50 20 35 50 210 275 103 155 9.5
250 1.5 2.5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 5 5 2.5 2.5 5 2.5 67.5 50 130 68 86
250 1.5 2.5 5
250 7.5 10 25
250 10 15 25
(Note 1) 250 15 25 35
550V AC 460V 220V DC 250V 500V AC 415V 380V 240V DC 250V 500V 250V DC 250V ca a b c ca kg
2.5 2.5 2.5 5 5
7.5 7.5 10 18 25
10 10 15 18 25
20 15 25 25 35
IEC
Rated shut-off capacity (kA)
P1 (sya)
2.5 2.5 5
7.5 10 25
10 15 25
20 25 35
NK (sym)
AC
75
2.5 50 130 68 86
75
7.5 60 155 68 86
90
10 105 165 86 110
140 257 103 132 5.0 5.8
Dimensions (mm)
96 52 67
Surface type product mass Connection method Surface type (F) Rear surface type (B) Inlaid type (FP) Insertion type (PM)
0.25 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.45 0.65 0.85
1.1
2.0
2.5
For crimp terminal Page 82
For crimp terminal
For crimp terminal
For crimp For crimp With bar With bar With bar terminal terminal terminal terminal terminal With barrier With barrier With barrier With barrier With barrier Bar stud Bar stud Bar stud Bar stud
Round stud Round stud Round stud
I - 37
[Reference for NFB selection] NFB made by Mitsubishi Electric Frame A Model Alarm switch (AL) Auxiliary switch (AX) Voltage trip device (SHT) With accessory devices Undervoltage trip device (UVT) Electrically controlled type (NFM) Machine mover (MI) Lead terminal block (LT) Closed type (S) In box Dust-proof type (I) Water-proof type (W) Handle lock device (Note 4) (HL) (LC) Operation handle (TOTTE) F type 116 106 (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) (HL) (LC) 118 109 97 92 (HL) (HL) (HL) (Spring charge) (Spring charge) (Spring charge) 30 NF30-CB 50 NF50-CS 60 NF60-CS 100 225 400 600 800 NF100-CS NF225-CS NF400-CS NF600-CS NF800-CS
(Sole(Solenoid) noid)
98
(TC-L) (TC-S)
(F032P) (F03) (F032P) (F03) (F102P) (F10) (S03) (142SS) (S03) (142SS) (S10) (141SS)
(F20) (S20) (42SS)
(F40) (S41) (60SS) (TC-L) (BTC)
(F60) (S40) (61SS) (TC-L) (BTC)
(F60) (S40) (61SS) (TC-L) (BTC)
Optional parts
S 102 type 110 84 84 85
Terminal cover (TC-L, S) (BTC) Rear surface stud (B-ST) Inlaid installation flame Insert terminal block
(TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-L) (TC-S) (BTC) (TC-S) (BTC) (TC-S) (BTC) (TC-S) (BTC)
Electrical part type approval ( certified)

* Acquired Classification In application Society approval (NK, LR, BY, AB, CL)
* (Excluding AB)
* NK, AB, LR GL
Overcurrent trip method With trip button
Fully electromagnetic Yes Yes Yes
Heat - electromagnetic Yes Yes
Electronic Heat adjustable type electromagnetic (adjustable)
Yes
Yes
(Note)
(1) Designate when using for DC applications. (2) 50A and smaller has the same structure as NF50-CS. (3) The rated current 100A for NF225-CS indicates the breaking capacity when the rated voltage is 380VAC or more (JIS, IEC). (4) Prepare HL in combination with the main unit.
I - 38
II. MDS-B/C1-CV Power Regeneration Type Power Supply Section
1. Power Supply Unit

1.1 Model configuration
Model configuration of power supply unit MDS-B/C1-CV -
Power supply capacity class symbol Symbol 37 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370 Capacity 3.7kW 5.5kW 7.5kW 11.0kW 15.0kW 18.5kW 22.0kW 26.0kW 30.0kW 37.0kW
Specifications None : Standard specifications S : Special specifications Note 1) The model indication MDS-B/C1-CV in this section indicates both the standard specifications (MDS-B/C1-CV) and the special specifications (MDS-B/C1-CVS).
WARNING
Do not omit the external contactor when using the MDS-B/C1-CV-370 or larger capacity. Failure to install one could result in damage.
II - 1
1.2 List of specifications

Power supply unit model (B/C1-CV-) Unit Output voltage Main circuit method Tolerable ambient temperature Tolerable ambient relative humidity Storage temperature Storage relative humidity Atmosphere Tolerable vibration Tolerable impact Maximum heating value Mass Capacity Tolerable power voltage Noise G G W kg kW V dB (A) C % C % 37 270V Converter with regenerative circuit (IPM incorporated) 0 to 55C 99% or less (with no dew condensation) 15C to 70C 99% or less (with no dew condensation) No harmful gases or dust 1G 5G (acceleration) 55 5.0 3.7 65 5.0 5.5 80 5.0 7.5 130 8.5 11.0 160 10.5 15.0 200 10.5 18.5 220 12.5 22.0 270 12.5 26.0 330 12.5 30.0 420 12.5 37.0 55 75 110 150 185 220 260 300 370
200/200 to 230V
+10% -15%
50/60Hz3Hz 55dB or less
II - 2
1.3 Hardware and parameter setting

(1) Hardware settings Set the rotary switch (SW1) as shown below.
SW1 setting 0 1 2 Setting prohibited 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 During operation with contactor (deposits are detected) During operation with no contactor External emergency stop When used B/C1-CV specifications During operation with contactor (deposits are detected) During operation with no contactor External emergency stop When not used
Charge lamp
10 Setting prohibited 11 12 13 14 15
Open the cover (right side of LED status indication window) on the upper front of the MDS-B/C1-CV power supply unit, and turn the rotary switch to set the presence of the external contactor. In the example on the left, a contactor is present. Note that the external contactor cannot be omitted for the MDS-B/C1-CV-370. Thus, SW1 cannot be set to "1" or "5".
II - 3
1.4 Status display WARNING

1. Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks. 2. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks. 3. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Check and adjust each parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so could lead to unforeseen operation of the machine. 2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
1.4.1 7-segment LED display

(1) Power ON
?
Initializing
?
Ready OFF
?
Ready ON, servo OFF
?
Servo ON (2) Display during alarm (example shows overvoltage alarm)
Alarm No.
Not lit
The alarm No. flickers
(3) Display during warning (This example shows the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure warning)
Warning No. (4) Watch dog alarm
Not lit
The warning No. flickers
1.4.2 Charge lamp

This lamp turns ON when the rectified voltage across P-N is charged over a set level. Always confirm that the charge lamp is not lit, and using a tester, confirm that the voltage has been discharged before starting maintenance work such as replacing the unit. II - 4
1.5 List of alarms and warnings CAUTION

To reset the alarm, remove the cause, confirm that the run signal is not input and ensure the surrounding safety. Then, turn the power ON/OFF or turn the alarm reset signal ON/OFF to resume operation. If an alarm occurs in the spindle amplifier, the base interception will be carried out and the motor will coast to a stop. To prevent fires, etc., set a sequence that cuts off the input power with an external sequence. (1) Alarm Alarm No. 61 63 65 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6E 6F 71 *1 73 75 *1 76 77 LED display Name Power module overcurrent Auxiliary regeneration error Rush relay error Open phase Watch dog Ground fault External contactor melt Rush relay melting Main circuit error Memory error Meaning An overcurrent (Ic) was detected in the power module (IPM). The auxiliary regenerative transistor is still ON. The rush resistance short-circuit relay has not turned ON. One of the input power phases (R, S, T) is open. The power supply software process did not complete within the set time. There is a ground fault in the motor. This is detected only at READY ON. The externally installed contactor turned ON even during READY OFF. The rush resistance short-circuit relay is still ON. The main circuit capacitor charging operation is not normal. An error occurred in the memory circuit. Mo- Retion lease a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a PR PR PR PR AR PR PR PR PR AR AR PR PR
(Note)
A/D converter error An A/D converter error or power supply error Power supply error was detected. The external contactor turned OFF even Instantaneous stop during READY ON. An instantaneous power stop occurred for 55ms or more.
Over-regeneration
The regeneration performance limit of the power supply was exceeded. The voltage between L+ and L exceeded 410V. The rotary switch setting and parameter (PTYP) setting do not match. Overheating of the power module (IPM) was detected.
Overvoltage External emergency stop setting error Power module overheat
PR AR PR
(Note 1) With alarm "73", to prevent immediately resumption of operation from the over-regeneration state, the alarm cannot be released unless the control power (L11, L12) continuity state has continued for 15 minutes or more after the alarm has occurred. The alarm cannot be released even if the NC power or control power is turned ON immediately after the alarm occurs. If the power is turned ON immediately after the alarm occurred, wait 15 minutes or more in the continuity state, and then turn the power ON again. II - 5
(2) Warning Alarm No. E8 LED display o Name Auxiliary regeneration frequency over Meaning Regeneration at the limit of the power supply's regeneration capacity is occurring frequently. Mo- Retion lease b
E9
An instantaneous power stop occurred for Instantaneous stop 25ms or more. (As the main circuit voltage warning has not dropped, an alarm has not occurred.) External emergency stop input The external emergency stop input signal was input. (24V is not applied on the CN23 connector.)
EA *1 EB
q r
b b
Over-regeneration 80% of the over-regeneration alarm level warning was reached.
*1 These alarms and warnings have been added from the MDS-B Series. Note 2) Note 3) The alarm No. in the above table indicates the alarm No. displayed on the spindle drive unit's LED, and the LED display indicates the alarm No. displayed on the power supply unit. The spindle drive unit operation and resetting methods are as follow when the above alarms or warnings occur. [Operation] a: The spindle drive unit is carried out base interception, the external contactor turns OFF, and the spindle motor coasts to a stop. b: Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues. [Resetting methods] AR : Turn the spindle drive unit and power supply power OFF once. PR : Turn the spindle drive unit reset input signal ON and OFF. : Operation is automatically resumed after the warning is reset.
II - 6
1.6 Explanation of connectors and terminal block

A connector for connecting the CN23 external emergency stop has been added to the MDS-B Series. Name CN4 Connector CN9 CN23 TE2 P N R0 S0 MC1 R S T G Application For connection of spindle drive unit (CH1) For connection of spindle drive unit (CH2) For connection of the external emergency stop Converter voltage output (+) Converter voltage output () 200VAC single phase input For externally installed contactor relay control 3-phase input power 200/220VAC Ground Remarks When connecting only one spindle drive unit, always connect to the CN4 side. Added with MDS-B.
Terminal block
TE3
TE4
II - 7
1.7 Functions added with MDS-B Series (Power supply external emergency stop function)
(1) Outline In addition to the emergency stop signal using the NC bus line, an emergency stop signal isolated from the outside has been added to provide double protection. The specifications are the same as the A Series even when this function is not used. (2) Details of detection (a) Setting When using the external emergency stop, the protection setting must be validated with the rotary switch on the front of the MDS-B-CV and the parameter (PTYP) of the connected drive unit. Rotary switch : External contactor valid....... Set to 4 External contactor invalid.... Set to 5 Parameter (PTYP) : Add 0040 to the currently set value. (Example) Current 0008 0030 Setting value 0048 0070
Note) If either of the settings are not made, an "external emergency stop setting error" will occur. (b) Detection details If the external emergency stop input is detected continuously for 200ms or more, this function will start. If the contactor OFF command from the NC is not received within 30 seconds after the external emergency stop input is detected, the CV itself will turn the contactor OFF. (c) Alarm (Warning) list CV View A display (flicker) m q q Connected drive unit display 76 EA 6F Alarm/warning details External emergency stop setting error Emergency stop state is applied from NC when external emergency stop input is input. When emergency stop from NC is not applied even when the external emergency stop is input
II - 8
(3) Connection
Emergency stop input The left drawing shows an example of the emergency stop input.
* The current that flows when the contact is ON is 15mA. Make sure not to mistake the polarity. (This function will not work if the 24VDC polarity is mistaken.)
(4) Connector name Part No. 101 102 Name Connector Contact Type 2-178288-3 1-175218-2 Maker AMP AMP
Wire size: 0.5 to 1.25SQ
24VDC
Drive unit side
II - 9
1.8 Main circuit connection WARNING

Provide Class 3 or higher grounding for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor.
CAUTION
1. Correctly connect the spindle amplifier and spindle motor power phase order (U, V, W). Failure to do so could result in abnormal operation of the spindle motor. 2. Apply only the designated voltage on each terminal. Failure to observe this could result in ruptures or faults.
Spindle drive unit MDS-A/B-SPA Power supply unit MDS-A/B-CV
Cabinet grounding
Cabinet grounding Contactor
Motor AC reactor
200/230VAC 50/60Hz
II - 10
* Starting with production in April 1995, a grounding bar has been attached to each unit before shipment. Wire as shown below, and do not tighten the grounding wires together.
Cabinet grounding
Cabinet grounding
Spindle drive unit side
Power supply unit side
Precautions for connections (1) The wires and crimp terminals will differ according to the capacity. (Refer to "8.3" in the Chapter I MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section.) (2) A 200V class power supply is used. The main circuit section does not have a transformer so always ground it. (3) The phase order of the power supply terminals L1, L2, L3 is random. (4) Refer to "8.4" in the Spindle System Configuration Section for the selection of the contactor, AC reactor and Circuit Breaker connected to the power supply. (5) Connect the specified power supply to the amplifier's power supply terminal (L1, L2, L3). If the power voltage is not as specified, use a transformer to adjust to within the specifications. (6) Do not connect the power wires (L1, L2, L3) to the spindle motor output terminals (U, V, W). (7) Confirm that the spindle motor output terminal (U, V, W) and spindle motor terminal (U, V, W) phase order matches. (8) Do not connect a commercial power supply directly to the spindle motor. (9) Check once again that the wires are connected correctly as indicated in the connection diagram.
II - 11
III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit System Section
2. Specifications
1. Model, Configuration and Connection

1.1 Model configuration
SJ 5.5
SJ
Name for AC spindle motor series Motor
Motor type None: Mid-large capacity N : Small capacity V : Small sized mid-large capacity
Basic speed A : 1500r/min B : 1150r/min L : 5000r/min X : Special speed
Special specification H : High-speed type Z : Special max. speed W : Wide range constant output
M : With Z-phase
15 min. (or 30 min.) rated output capacity (kW) (Note) Refer to the separate Built-in Motor Standard Specifications (BFN-14118-04) for details on the built-in motor models.
MDS-B/C1-SPT None : Standard type : Slim type (1) When between 0.1kW or more and less than 1kW 0 0.01kW will be 1. (Leave blank when 0.)
TOSNUC corresponding to AC spindle inverter (Spindle drive unit)
Output capacity
Controller
0.1kW will be 1. (Example) For 0.4kW 04 For 0.75kW 075
(2) When 1kW or more 0.1kW will be 1. (Example) For 3.7kW 37 For 30kW 300
III - 1
2. Specifications
1.2 Configuration
1.2.1 Basic configuration (No additional specifications)
MDS-B/C1-SPT CN1A Connect with NC
For coil changeover MC To check pin card
Terminator PLG CN9 CN4 Connect with CV CN5 CN6
Motor build-in encoder Motor thermoswitch
Connect with NC CN7 Connect with NC U V W
CN8
1.2.2 With orientation function

(1) Magnetic sensor orientation (1-point) specifications
MDS-B/C1-SPT CN1A Connect with NC CN9
Terminator PLG CN4 Connect with CV CN5 CN6
Connect with NC Connect with NC
CN7 U V W
CN8
Magnet
Detector
Sensor
Magnet sensor
(2) Encoder orientation (4096-point) specifications

Terminator CN9 PLG CN4 Connect with CV CN5 CN6
CN8 ENC
Encoder for orientation 1024p/rev
III - 2
2. Specifications
(3) Z-phase motor built-in encoder orientation (4096-point) specifications

Terminator CN9 PLG CN4 Connect with CV CN5 CN6
Z-phase motor built-in encoder Motor temperature switch
CN8
III - 3
2. Specifications
1.3 Device-to-device connections

NFB2
Connector wiring CN1A CN1B CN4 CN6 CN8
NFB1 T(1,3) T(1,2) T(1,1)
A-AL
L3 L2 L1
Contactor
TYPE MDS-B/C1-CV- MC1

L11 L21 L+ L
CN9 CN5 CN4
Connector case 1 to 20
CN7
CN4 L11 L21 L+ LConnector case 1 to 20 U
BU BV E U V W CN5 I.M INDUCTION MOTOR FM BLOWER
CNC PNS1 PNS2

CN20 EMG+ EMG11 13
GROUND (PE)
TYPE MDS-B/C1-SPT-
CN1A 7 17 3 13 2 12 4 14 CN7 AG (GND) (N15) (PZ) (N15) (PA) (RA) (PB) (RB)
V W
1 15 8 5 6 16 7 17
9 6 5 8 1 2 3 4
ALARM+ 17 ALARM- 19 HTD+ HTDHRD+ HRD 18 20 22 24
PLG
PULSE SIGNAL GENERATOR
Connector case (MOH) (RG) OHS1 3 13 OHS2
ANS+ ANSREQ+ REQGND FG
2 4 3 5 26 14
7 17 6 16 1 11,15 RG
THERMAL PROTECTOR
CN6 (P.S) 10 19,20 1 , 11 15 2 12 3 H K A N C R B P
CN1B 1 Terminator (A-TM) 20 CN9 D/A output 1/speedometer 10V max. speed D/A output 2/load meter 10V 120% torque Coil changeover output signal Spindle/C-axis changeover signal L11(GND) 9 19 AG DG
(GND) (MA) (MA*) (MB)
ORIENT ROTARY ENCORDER
(MB*) 13 (MZ) (MZ*) 4 14
Connector case
8
RA RA
CN6 (MAG) (MAGR) 6 16 7 A D F E C B
18 RG RG
PNS2
CN6 AH AL BH BL ZH ZL DAT+ DATFG 11 12 13 14 9 10 7 8 15 CN8 2 12 3 13 4 14 5 15 DG AG
(LS)
(LSR)17 17 (P15) (GND) Connector case CN7 (P.S) (GND) (MA) (MA*) (MB) 10 19,20 1 , 11 15 2 12 3 5 15
ORIENT MAGNETIC SENSER
H K F L G M S T
C-AXIS ENCORDER
(MB*) 13 (MZ) (MZ*) 4 14
Connector case
III - 4
2. Specifications
2. Specifications
2.1 AC spindle motor and controller specifications
(Note 1) The rated output is guaranteed with the power supply unit's rated input voltage (200/220/230VAC). The rated output may not be achieved if the input voltage fluctuates and drops this level. (Note 2) Contact Mitsubishi when a rated output range other than 1:8, or 1:12 is required. (Note 3) The 50% ED rating is ON for five minutes and OFF for five minutes in the 10 minute cycle time. (Note 4) Refer to section I and II for details on the drive units power capacity, total heating value, rated power voltage and mass. (Note 5) Refer to the separate Built-in Motor Standard Specifications (BFN-14118-04) for details on the built-in motor.
Series Item Base speed 1500rpm Series
Model 5.5A
Output capacity
SJ7.5A 7/5.5 10/7.5 11AP 9/7 15/11 11A 10/7.5 15/11 15A 15/11 20/15 18.5A 20/15 25/18.5 22AP 20/15 30/22 22A 25/18.5 30/22 26A 30/22 35/26 30A 30/22 40/30 (HP)/(kW) (HP)/(kW) 5/3.7 7/5.5
Cont. rating 30 min. rating 50% ED rating Basic speed Max. speed
Speed
(rpm) (rpm) 8000 A112 (kgm) 2.4 0.08 60 150 B112 3.57 0.10 70 200 35 V5 (dB) [A] 75 4.54 0.12 75 6000 B132 4.87 0.17 100
1500 4500 C132 7.15 0.21 110 9.74 0.27 130 9.74 0.32 150 300 130 V10 80 A160 12.0 0.55 175 B160 14.3 0.69 200
Frame No.
AC spindle motor
Cont. rated torque GD

2
(kgm ) (kg) (kg) (W)
Mass Tolerable radial load Cooling fan capacity Vibration Noise Installation Overload withstand level Ambient temperature Insulation class Paint color Accessories Bearing lubrication method
Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) 120% of 30-minute rated output for 1 minute or less (C) 0 to 40 F class Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Pulse generator and overheat detector Grease Fig.1 Fig.2
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Output characteristics drawing

Series Item
Fig.3
Model Compatible power supply unit model Main circuit

Drive unit
55 55
75 75
110 110
150 150
185 185
220 220
260 260
300 300
MDS-B/C1-CV IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Power regeneration type
Control circuit Braking Speed control range Speed fluctuation rate Speed command Ambient temperature/humidity Atmosphere Vibration Compliant standards (rpm)
35 to 8000
35 to 6000
35 to 4500
Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Analog command 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10K) 0C to 55C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation) To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103) 1G or less IEC
III - 5
2. Specifications
Series Item
Wide (1 : 8) rated output Series
Wide (1 : 12) rated output Series
Model 5.5XW8
Speed Output capacity
SJ7.5XW8 7/5.5 10/7.5 750 6000 B112 4.80 0.12 75 200 35 V5 (dB)[A] 75 (kg-m ) (kg) (W)
2
11XW8 10/7.5 15/11
15XW8 15/11 20/15
18.5XW8 5.5XWC 20/15 25/18.5 5/3.7 7/5.5 500 6000 B180 23.3 1.36 300 400 B132 7.20 0.21 110
7.5XWC 7/5.5 10/7.5
11XWC 10/7.5 15/11 400 4800
15XWC 15/11 20/15
Cont. rating (HP)/(kW) 30 min. rating (HP)/(kW) 50%ED Basic speed Max. speed (rpm) (rpm)
5/3.7 7/5.5
625 5000 C132 9.74 0.32 150 300 130 V10 80 B160 17.1 0.69 200
Frame No.
AC spindle motor
B132 7.14 0.21 110
A160 13.4 0.55 175 300 180
B180 18.3 1.26 300 400 V10 80
A200 26.8 2.19 390 600 360 85
Cont. rated torque (kg-m) GD

2
Mass Cooling fan capacity Vibration Noise Installation
Tolerable radial load (kg)
35 V5 75
Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) 120% of 30-minute rated output for 1 minute or less 0 to 40 F class Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Pulse generator and overheat detector Grease Fig. 4 Fig. 5 Fig. 6 Fig. 7
Overload withstand level Ambient temperature (C) Insulation class Paint color Accessories Bearing lubrication method Output characteristics drawing
Series Item
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
Model Compatible power supply unit model Main circuit Control circuit
Drive unit
110 55 75
220 110
260 150
300 MDS-B/C1-CV185
110 55
150 75
260 110
300 150
IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Power regeneration type 35 to 6000 35 to 5000 35 to 6000 35 to 4800
Braking Speed control range (rpm) Speed fluctuation rate Speed command Ambient temperature/humidity Atmosphere Vibration Compliant standards
Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Analog command 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10K) 0C to 55C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation) To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103) 1G or less IEC
III - 6
2. Specifications
Series Item
High-speed Series
Model 5.5AZ
SJ7.5AZ 7/5.5 10/7.5 1500 10000 A112 2.4 0.08 60 140 35 V5 (dB)[A] 75 85 Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) 120% of 30-minute rated output for 1 minute or less 0 to 40 F class Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Pulse generator and overheat detector Grease Fig. 8 Fig. 9
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
5.5LH 5/3.7 7/5.5 5000 20000
7.5LH 7/5.5 10/7.5
11LH 10/7.5 15/11 5000 15000
15LH 15/11 20/15
5/3.7 7/5.5
Frame No.
AC spindle motor
B112 3.57 0.10 70
A100 0.72 0.02 60
B100 1.07 0.025 65 5
B132 1.46 0.07 95
C132 2.14 0.095 115

2
(kg-m ) (kg) (W)
Series Item
Oil air lubrication Fig. 10
Drive unit
55 55 75
75 MDS-B/C1-CV55 75
110 110
150 150
IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Power regeneration type 35 to 10000 35 to 20000 35 to 15000 Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Analog command 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10K) 0C to 55C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation) To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103) 1G or less IEC
III - 7
2. Specifications
Series Item
SJ-N Series
Model 0.75A
SJ-N 1.5A 1/0.75 2/1.5 10 min. 1500 B71 0.26 0.0045 15 50 20 40 V5 (dB)[A] 75 Horizontal or vertical (output shaft down) 120% of 30-minute/15-minute/10-minute rated output for 1 minute or less 0 to 40 F class Munsell 5.27G 2.46/0.21 Pulse generator and overheat detector Grease Fig. 11
MDS-B/C1-SPT-
2.2X 2/1.5 3/2.2 15 min. 3000 10000 C71 0.48 0.0086 20
2.2A 2/1.5 3/2.2 15 min.
3.7A 3/2.2 5/3.7 15 min.
5.5AP 5/3.7 7/5.5 15 min. 1500
5.5A 5/3.7 7/5.5
7.5A 7/5.5 10/7.5
0.5/0.4 1/0.75 10min.
8000 A90 0.97 0.017 33 B90 1.43 0.021 37 100 55 0.045 45 C90 2.4 0.058 63 150 35 A112 B112 3.57 0.071 74 200
Frame No.
AC spindle motor

2
(kg-m ) (kg) (W)
Series Item
Drive unit
075 37
15 37
22 37
37 MDS-B/C1-CV37
55 55
75 75
IGBT IPM sinusoidal wave PWM inverter Pulse generator speed feedback, digital closed-loop control, vector control Power regeneration type 35 to 10000 35 to 8000 Max. 0.2% of maximum speed (under load varying from 10% to 100%) Analog command 10V (or +10V) max. (Input impedance approx. 10K) 0C to 55C / 90%RH or less (with no dew condensation) To be free from detrimental gas and dust (to conform with "grade C" environmental resistance specified by JEM1103) 1G or less IEC
III - 8
2. Specifications
2.2 Output characteristics

Fig. 1
Output P1/P2/P3/P4 SJ-5.5A SJ-7.5A 5.5/3.7/3/2 (kW) 7.5/5.5/4/3 (kW) 7/5/4/2.5 (HP) 10/7/5/4 (HP)
Fig. 2
SJ-11AP 11/7/8/5 (kW) 15/9/10/7 (HP) Output P1/P2/P3/P4 SJ-11A SJ-15A 11/7.5/8/5.5 (kW) 15/11/11/8 (kW) 15/10/10/7 (HP) 20/15/15/10 (HP) SJ-18.5A 18.5/15/13.5/11 (kW) 25/20/18/15 (HP)
30min. rating
30min. rating Output
Output
Continuous rating
Continuous rating Speed
Standard
Speed
Fig. 3
SJ-22AP 22/15 (kW) 30/20 (HP) Output P1/P2 SJ-22A SJ-26A 22/18.5 (kW) 26/22 (kW) 30/25 (HP) 25/30 (HP) SJ-30A 30/22 (kW) 40/30 (HP)
30min. rating Output Continuous rating
Speed
Fig. 4
SJ-5.5XWB 5.5/3.7 (kW) 7/5 (HP) Output P1/P2 SJ-7.5XWB 7.5/5.5 (kW) 10/7 (HP) SJ-11XWB 11/7.5 (kW) 15/10 (HP)
Fig. 5
Output P1/P2 SJ-15XWB SJ-18.5XWB 15/11 (kW) 18.5/15 (kW) 20/15 (HP) 25/20 (HP)
Output
30min. rating Continuous rating
Output
Wide constant output
Speed
Speed
Fig. 6
Output P1/P2 SJ-5.5XWC 5.5/3.7 (kW) 7/5 (HP)
Fig. 7
SJ-7.5XWC 7.5/5.5 (kW) 10/7 (HP) Output P1/P2 SJ-11XWC 11/7.5 (kW) 15/10 (HP) SJ-15XWC 15/11 (kW) 20/15 (HP)
Output
Output
Speed
Speed
Fig. 8
Output P1/P2/P3/P4 SJ-5.5AZ SJ-7.5AZ 5.5/3.7/2.4/1.6 (kW) 7.5/5.5/3/2 (kW) 7/5/3.2/2.4 (HP) 10/7/4/2.6 (HP)
Fig. 9
Output P1/P2 SJ-5.5LH 5.5/3.7 (kW) 7/5 (HP) SJ-7.5LH 7.5/5.5 (kW) 10/7 (HP)
Fig. 10
Output P1/P2 SJ-11LH SJ-15LH 11/7.5 (kW) 15/11 (kW) 15/10 (HP) 20/15 (HP)
High-speed
30min. rating Output Output 30min. rating Continuous rating Output 30min. rating Continuous rating
Continuous rating Speed Speed
Speed
III - 9
2. Specifications
Fig.11
SJ-N0.75A
10min. rating Continuous rating Output Output
SJ-N1.5A
Speed (r/min)
Speed (r/min)
SJ-N2.2X
15min. rating Continuous rating Output
SJ-N2.2A
15min. rating
Speed (r/min)
Output
Continuous rating
Speed (r/min)
SJ-N3.7A
SJ-N5.5AP
Speed (r/min)
Speed (r/min)
SJ-N5.5A
SJ-N7.5A
30min. rating
Speed (r/min)
Speed (r/min)
III - 10
2. Specifications
2.3 Outline dimension drawings

2.3.1 Motor
Standard flange type 112 to 200 frame
Terminal box
Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Nameplate
Section BB
Air outlet
Cooling fan Notes: 1. 2.

Frame No. A112F B112F B132F C132F A160F B160F B180F A200F
Air inlet A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
Motor LC LD LE LF 250 204 5 164 250 204 5 164 300 250 5 164 300 250 5 164 350 310 5 189 350 310 5 189 400 350 5 224 450 378 5 278
S* Section AA
DIM IN mm
D 208 208 254 254 314 314 354 380
L 549 614 677 742 785 850 909 932
IE 152 152 180 180 206 206 238 272
KD 44 44 44 44 51 51 51 63
KL 438 483 516 581 600.5 665.5 701.5 733
KH 102 102 117 117 133 133 160 202
LA 215 215 265 265 300 300 350 400
LB 180 180 230 230 250 250 300 350
LG 13 13 20 20 20 20 25 30
LH 52 52 55 55 60 60 68 73
LJ 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
LL 489 534 567 632 675 740 769 792
LZ 15 15 15 15 19 19 19 19
IF 317 317 376 376 438 438 509 581
LR 60 80 110 110 110 110 140 140
Q QK 60 45 80 63 110 80 110 80 110 90 110 90 140 110 140 110
Shaft end S T U 28 7 4 32 8 5 48 9 5.5 48 9 5.5 55 10 6 55 10 6 60 11 7 60 11 7
W 7 10 14 14 16 16 18 18
QL 7.5 8 10 10 10.5 10.5 15 15
* h6 h6 h6 h6 m6 m6 m6 m6
Standard leg installation 112 to 200 frame

Terminal box
Leads port can be placed on left or right. Nameplate
Air outlet
Air inlet
Cooling fan
Note: 1.
A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
S* Section AA
DIM IN mm
Frame No. A112M B112M B132M C132L A160L B160L B180L A200L
A 349 394 389 441.5 440 505 508.5 506.5
B 135 135 173 185.5 230 230 247.5 272.5
C 112 112 132 132 160 160 180 200
D E F 206 95 70 206 95 70 252 108 89 252 108 101.5 312 127 127 312 127 127 352 139.5 139.5 380 159 152.5
G 15 15 17 17 20 20 22 25
H 215 215 258 258 316 316 358 390
I 264 264 312 312 366 366 418 472
Motor J K KD KL KH LF LJ L M N Z Q QK R 40 70 44 298 102 164 6 549 230 180 12 60 45 200 40 70 44 343 102 164 6 614 230 180 12 80 63 220 45 89 44 338 117 164 6 677 260 218 12 110 80 288 45 89 44 390.5 117 164 6 742 260 243 12 110 80 300.5 55 108 51 365.5 133 189 6 785 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 108 51 430.5 133 189 6 850 310 304 15 110 90 345 70 121 51 441 160 224 6 909 350 338 19 140 110 400.5 85 133 63 447.5 202 278 6 932 400 385 19 140 110 425.5
Shaft end S T U 28 7 4 32 8 5 48 9 5.5 48 9 5.5 55 10 6 55 10 6 60 11 7 60 11 7
W QC * 7 7.5 h6 10 8 h6 14 10 h6 14 10 h6 16 10.5 m6 16 10.5 m6 18 15 m6 18 15 m6
III - 11
2. Specifications
Thin type leg installation type

Cooling fan Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Air inlet
Terminal box
Air outlet
S*
Section AA Nameplate Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
DIM IN mm Frame No. B132LU C132LU A160LU B160LU B180LU A 312 364.5 322 387 399.5 B 173 185.5 230 230 255.5 C 132 132 160 160 180 D E 320 108 320 108 356 127 356 127 400 139.5 F 89 101.5 127 127 139.5 G 17 17 20 20 22 H 304 304 348 348 397 I 371 371 446 446 495 Motor Shaft end J K KD KL KH LF LJ L M N Z Q QK R S T U 45 89 44 262 170 95 6 600 260 218 12 110 80 288 48 9 5.5 45 89 44 314.5 170 95 6 665 260 243 12 110 80 300.5 48 9 5.5 55 108 51 272 195 118 6 667 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 55 108 51 337 195 118 6 732 310 304 15 110 90 345 55 10 6 70 121 51 349.5 222 118 6 800 350 338 19 140 110 400.5 60 11 7 W QC * 14 10 h6 14 10 h6 16 10.5 m6 16 10.5 m6 18 15 m6
High-speed 10,000rpm
Terminal box
Section
S*
Air outlet Cooling fan Air outlet

Frame No. A112F B112F
Section AA
Ventilation hole (Three places at * mark)
Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. 2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down. 3. When using with the axis installed horizontally, install so that the ventilation holes come to the left, right and bottom.
DIM IN mm D L IE 208 549 152 208 549 152 KD 44 44 KL 438 483 Motor KH LA LB LC LD LE LF 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 102 215 180 250 204 5 164 LG 13 13 LH 52 52 LJ 7 7 LL 489 534 LZ 15 15 IF 317 317 LR 60 60 Q 60 60 QK 45 45 Shaft end S T U 28 7 4 28 7 4 W 7 7 QL 7.5 7.5 * h6 h6
High-speed 15000, 20000rpm

1 oil air inlet (M8 x 1 screw)
Note: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. 2. When using with the axis installed horizontally, install so that the ventilation holes come to the left, right and bottom.
Oil air inlet (M8 x 2 screws) Leads port can be placed on left or right.
Terminal box
Section
132F *
Air outlet
S*
Cooling fan 1 oil air outlet (PF1/8)
Air outlet
1 oil air outlet Section AA (PF1/8)
* 100F
DIM IN mm
Frame No. A100F B100F B132F C132F
D 208 208 254 254
L 549 574 606 626
IE 152 152 180 180
KD 44 44 44 44
KL 418 443 475 495
KH 102 102 117 117
LA 265 265 265 300
LB 230 230 230 250
Motor LC 300 300 300 350
LD 250 250 250 300
LE 5 5 5 5
LF 164 164 164 164
LG 25 25 25 25
LH 60 60 60 60
LL 469 494 526 546
LZ 19 19 19 24
IF 317 317 376 376
LR 80 80 80 80
Q 80 80 80 80
QK 63 63 63 63
Shaft end S T U 32 8 5 32 8 5 32 8 5 32 8 5
W 10 10 10 10
QL 8 8 8 8
* h6 h6 h6 h6
III - 12
2. Specifications
Terminal box
Air inlet Nameplate Section BB
Air outlet
Cooling fan
Notes: 1.
Air inlet
2.
A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down. Section AA
Frame No. A90F B90F
Motor L 401 431 KL 290 320 LL 341 371
DIM IN mm
Terminal box
Leads port can be placed on left or right. Nameplate
Air outlet
Air inlet
Cooling fan Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. Section AA
Frame No. A90S B90L
Motor A B 235 101 252.5 113.5 F 50 62.5 KL 184 201.5 L 401 431 N 130 155
Shaft end R 166 178.5 DIM IN mm
III - 13
2. Specifications
Terminal box
Air inlet Nameplate Section BB
Air outlet
Cooling fan
Air inlet
Notes: 1. 2.
A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down.
Section AA
Frame No. A112F B112F
Motor L 549 614 KL 438 483 LL 489 534 LR 60 80 Q 60 80 QK 45 63
Shaft end S 28 32 T 7 8 U 4 5 W 7 10 QL 7.5 8
DIM IN mm
Terminal box
Nameplate
Air outlet
Air inlet
Cooling fan
Notes: 1.
A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall.
Section AA
Frame No. A112M B112M
Motor A 349 394 KL 298 343 L 549 614 Q 60 80 QK 45 63 R 200 220
Shaft end S 28 32 T 7 8 U 4 5 W 7 10 QL 7.5 8
DIM IN mm
III - 14
Leads port can be place on left or right side. Suspension bolt (M8 screw, 3 positions)
Terminal box Main unit nameplate
Section BB
2. Specifications
III - 15
Air outlet Air inlet Cooling fan 2-M8 screw Section AA
Frame No.
C90F
Notes: 1. A space of at least 30mm should be provided between the cooling fan and nearby located wall. 2. It can be installed vertically with the shaft down. 3. When removing the suspension bolts for use, cover the screw holes with bolts, etc. The screw length used should be less than the suspension bolt screw size 1.5.
3. Status Display and Parameter Settings

WARNING
1. Do not operate the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks. 2. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and could lead to electric shocks. 3. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result depending on the machine. 2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor (unit) and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns.
III - 16
3.1
Status display with 7-segment LED
The status can be displayed on the 7-segment LED on the power supply and spindle drives when the power is turned ON.
MDS-A/B-CV power supply unit 3 200/230VAC ON
MDS-A/B-SPA spindle drive unit 3 200/230VAC ON
Initializing
Initializing
Waiting for READY ON
Alarm No. display at alarm occ rrence

Alarm display during alarm (When the parameter error AL37 occurs, the alarm No. and parameter No. are displayed.)
Waiting for READY Emergency ON stop READY ON Waiting for servo ON Servo ON
READY ON
Normal operation Normal operation Reset or emergency stop Reset
III - 17
3.2
Spindle parameters
1. Parameter
CAUTION
Do not make extreme adjustments or changes to the parameters as the operation could become unstable. (1) Parameter list Note 1) Note 2) Note 3) For the parameters marked with an asterisk in the CNG column, the parameter value set from TOSNUC is validated even without turning the spindle drive unit power OFF. DEC in the TYP column indicates a parameter set with a decimal, and HEX indicates a parameter set with a hexadecimal. If SP257(RPM) is set to "0002", set 1/2 of the required value for all parameters indicated as "r/min" in the Unit column. Example) To set maximum motor speed to 40000r/min Set SP017: TSP to "20000".
Name Magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation position loop gain Encoder orientation position loop gain Orientation in-position width Orientation mode changing speed limit value Details As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter and servo rigidity is increased. However, vibration is increased and the machine becomes likely to overshoot. Same as above TYP CNG DEC *
Standard setting
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Unit rad/s
Spindle specifications
SP001 PGM
100 1/10
Tolerable setting range 0 to 1000
SP002 PGE
DEC
100 1/10 rad/s
0 to 1000
SP003 SP004 OINP SP005 OSP
SP006 CSP
Orientation mode deceleration rate Position shift amount for orientation
SP007 OPST
SP008 to SP016 SP017 TSP Maximum motor speed SP018 ZSP Motor zero speed Set the motor speed for zero speed output. When one of the forward run, reverse run or orientation signals turns OFF and the motor speed is less than the speed here, the motor will coast to a stop. Set a small value if the spindle hunting amount is large just before stopping from rotation. (Practical minimum setting value = approx. 10) SP019 CSN1 Speed command Set the time constant (linear) for the speed command from acceleration/ 0 to the motor's maximum speed. deceleration time Note that this is invalid after changing to position loop constant during orientation and during the S-analog synchronous tapping mode. This setting is only the time constant (linear) for the command, and the actual motor acceleration/deceleration time will be determined by the relation of the motor output, load GD2 and frictional torque. This setting is normally set to "30". Set a large value to intentionally lengthen the acceleration/deceleration time. SP020 SDTS Speed detection Set the motor speed for which speed detection output is set value performed. Usually, the setting value is 10% of SP017 (TSP).
Not used. Set "0". Set the position error range in which an orientation completion signal is output. Set the motor speed limit value to be used when the speed loop is changed to the position loop in orientation mode. When this parameter is set to "0", SP017 (TSP) becomes the limit value. If the machine has a large deceleration rate and has two or more gear stages, the orientation speed may differ greatly for each gears and cause the orientation operation to be unstable. Set SP037 (SFNC5) bitD to "1" in this case to stabilize the operation. As the set value is larger, the orientation time becomes shorter. However, the machine becomes likely to overshoot. Set the orientation stop position. (1) Motor built-in encoder, encoder (1024p/rev) orientation Set a value obtained by dividing 360 by 4096. (2) Magnetic sensor orientation Divide -5 to +5 by 1024, and set 0 as "0". Not used. Set "0". Set the motor's maximum speed.
DEC DEC
0 16 1/16 0 r/min
0 to 2880 0 to 32767
DEC
20
0 to 1000
DEC
0 (1) 0 to 4095
(2) -512 to 512 DEC DEC 0 6000 r/min 50 r/min 1 to 32767 1 to 1000
DEC
30 10ms
1 to 32767
DEC
600 r/min
0 to 32767
III - 18
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name Torque limit 1
Details
TYP CNG *
Standard setting
Unit
Spindle specifications
SP021 TLM1
SP022 VGNP1 Speed loop gain proportional term under speed control SP023 VGNI1 Speed loop gain integral term under speed control SP024 Not used. Set "0". SP025 GRA1 Spindle gear teeth Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to count 1 gear 00. When the spindle speed is slower than the motor speed (deceleration specifications), GRA* > GRB* applies. If GRA* or GRB* is larger than 32767, multiple both setting values by 1/N (N is a random natural number), and set a value close to 32767. SP026 GRA2 Spindle gear teeth Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to count 2 gear 01. SP027 GRA3 Spindle gear teeth Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to count 3 gear 10. SP028 GRA4 Spindle gear teeth Set the number of spindle side gear teeth in respect to count 4 gear 11. SP029 GRB1 Motor shaft gear Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to teeth count 1 gear 00. SP030 GRB2 Motor shaft gear Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to teeth count 2 gear 01. SP031 GRB3 Motor shaft gear Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to teeth count 3 gear 10. SP032 GRB4 Motor shaft gear Set the number of motor shaft side gear teeth in respect to teeth count 4 gear 11. SP033 SFNC1 Spindle function 1 Select the spindle function 1 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details. SP034 SFNC2 Spindle function 2 Select the spindle function 2 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details. SP035 SFNC3 Spindle function 3 Select the spindle function 3 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details. SP036 SFNC4 Spindle function 4 Select the spindle function 4 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details. SP037 SFNC5 Spindle function 5 Select the spindle function 5 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details. SP038 SFNC6 Spindle function 6 Select the spindle function 6 with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details. SP039 ATYP Drive unit capacity Set the capacity of the drive unit to be used. Refer to section (3) for details. SP040 MTYP Motor selection This is valid when SP034 (SFNC2) bit-0 is set to "0". Set the applicable motor No. from the motors listed in section (3). This parameter is ignored when SP034 (SFNC2) bit-0 is set to "1". SP041 PTYP Power supply Set the power supply unit capacity when the drive unit capacity selection being used is connected with the power supply unit (between CN4-CN4). Set "0" when the drive unit is not connected. Refer to section (3) for details. SP042 to SP044 Not used. Set "0". SP045 CSNT Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" constant unless otherwise specified. SP046 CSN2 Speed command Set this to smoothly change the speed command only at dual cushion the start of the acceleration/deceleration in respect to the acceleration/deceleration time constant set with SP019 (CNS1). If the gears make a noise at the start of acceleration/deceleration, set this to a value other than "0" to reduce the gear noise. Increase the value in increments from "1" and set the value at which the annoying noise is eliminated. The smoothness will increase when this value is small, but the acceleration/deceleration time will be longer. This function is invalidated when "0" is set. SP047 SDTR Speed detection Set the reset value in respect to the speed detection reset value output setting value set in SP020 (SDTS). SP048 SUT Speed reach Set the ratio of the speed deflection in respect to the range speed command for outputting the speed reached output signal.
Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal DEC 001. The 30-minute rated output torque is equivalent to 100%. Set the speed loop proportional gain for speed control. DEC The responsiveness will improve when the value is increased, but the vibration and noise will also increase. (Practical setting range: approx. 30 to 150) Set the speed loop integral gain for speed control. DEC Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP022 (VGNP1) is approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.)
10 %
63 rad/s
0 to 1000
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
0 1
1 to 32767
DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC HEX HEX HEX HEX HEX HEX HEX HEX
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFF 0000 to FFFF 0000 to 0010 0000 to 001F
Spindle/machine specifications
HEX
0000
0000 to FFFF
DEC DEC
0 0 0
0 to 1000 0 to 1000
DEC DEC
30 r/min 15 %
0 to 1000 0 to 100
III - 19
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name Torque limit 2
Details
TYP CNG DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC * * * * * *
Standard setting
Unit
Spindle/machine specifications
SP049 TLM2
Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 010. SP050 TLM3 Torque limit 3 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 011. SP051 TLM4 Torque limit 4 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 100. SP052 TLM5 Torque limit 5 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 101. SP053 TLM6 Torque limit 6 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 110. SP054 TLM7 Torque limit 7 Set the torque limit value for the torque limit input signal 111. SP055 SETM Excessive speed Set the time for outputting the excessive speed deviation deviation timer alarm. If the total of the acceleration, deceleration and time is longer than the standard setting, set a value 1.5-times the total. SP056 PYVR Variable excitation Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate. If rate the gear noise and vibration, etc., are large, set a small value. However, this will cause the impact load response to drop. Set "50" unless absolutely necessary. If a value higher than "50" is set to improve the impact load response, make sure that there are no problems such as gear noise, motor excitation noise or vibration during orientation stop, etc. If a value smaller than "50" is set to improve the gear noise, motor excitation noise or vibration during orientation stop, make sure that there are no problems with the impact load response or holding force during orientation stop. (Practical setting range: 20 to 75) SP057 STOD Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set the value constant given in the Parameter Setting Table. SP058 SDT2 Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" constant unless otherwise specified. SP059 MKT Coil changeover Set the base cutoff time for changing the contactor during base cutoff timer coil changeover. If the value is too small, the contactor could melt. Set a value obtained by adding +50ms to the ON/OFF delay time of the contactor in use. SP060 MKT2 Current limit timer Set the time to limit the current after changing the after coil contactor during coil changeover. changeover SP061 MKIL Current limit value Set the value for limiting the current after changing the after coil contactor during coil changeover. The interval is the time changeover set with SP060 (MKT2). SP062 Not used. Set "0". SP063 OLT Overload alarm 1 Set the detection time for outputting the motor overload detection time alarm 1. SP064 OLL Overload alarm 1 Set the detection level for outputting the motor overload detection level alarm 1. SP065 VCGN1 Target value of Set the ratio of the speed loop proportional gain in respect variable speed to SP022 (VGNP1) at the maximum speed set in SP017 loop proportional (TSP). gain SP066 VCSN1 Change starting Set the speed to start changing the speed loop speed of variable proportional gain. speed loop This parameter and SP065 (VCGN1) are changed from proportional gain the standard value if the motor vibrates in high-speed ranges, etc., when SP022 (VGNP1) is increased from the standard value to improve the responsiveness in respect to the impact load response at low speeds.
Proportional gain SP022 SP022(SP065/100)
20 % 30 % 40 % 50 % 60 % 70 % 12 sec
Tolerable setting range 0 to 120 0 to 120 0 to 120 0 to 120 0 to 120 0 to 120 0 to 60
DEC
50 %
0 to 100
DEC DEC DEC
7 r/min 0 r/min 150 ms
0 to 50 0 to 32767 0 to 10000
DEC
500 ms
0 to 10000
DEC
75 %
0 to 120
DEC DEC DEC DEC
0 60 sec 110 % 100 %
0 to 1000 0 to 200 0 to 100
Speed control
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
Speed SP066 SP017
III - 20
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name Change starting speed of variable current loop gain Change ending speed of variable current loop gain Variable current loop gain
Details Set the speed where the current loop gain change starts.
TYP CNG DEC
Standard setting
Unit
Speed control
SP067 VIGWA
0 r/min
SP068 VIGWB
Set the speed where the current loop gain change ends.
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
SP069 VIGN
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount, excitation amount) for the speed set with SP068 (VIGWB).
Gain SP069(1/16-fold)
DEC
0 1/16-folg
0 to 32767
1-fold Speed SP067 SP068 SP017
Use the following values are reference for setting SP067 (VIGWA) to SP069 (VING). Maximum motor speed SP017 (TSP) 6000 or less 6001 to 8000 8001 or more SP067 (VIGWA) 0 5000 5000 SP068 (VIGWB) 0 8000 10000 SP069 (VIGN) 0 48 64
SP070 FHz
SP071 VR2WA SP072 VR2WB SP073 VR2GN SP074 IGDEC SP075 R2KWS SP076 FONS
Machine resonance suppression filter frequency Fixed control constant Fixed control constant Fixed control constant Fixed control constant Fixed control constant Machine resonance suppression filter operation speed
SP077 TDSL
Fixed control constant SP078 FPWM Fixed control constant SP079 ILMT Fixed control constant SP080
Observe the following when setting this parameter: 1) If the motor seems to hunt (high frequency vibration) when rotating at high speeds, decrement SP069 (VING) by "-8" at a time, and set a value at which hunting does not occur. 2) If the motor seems to groan (low frequency vibration) when rotating at high speeds, increment SP069 (VING) by "+8" at a time, and set a value at which groaning does not occur. 3) If "AL32" (overcurrent) or "AL75" (overvoltage) occurs when decelerating from the maximum speed, decrement or increment SP069 (VING) by "+8" or "-8" to a value where the alarm does not occur. 4) If there is no problem when rotating at the maximum speed, but phenomenon 1) or 2) occurs during rotation in the medium-speed range, change the SP067 (VIGWA) and SP068 (VIGWB) setting. When machine vibration occurs in speed and position control, set the frequency of the required vibration suppression. Note that a value of 100Hz or more is set. Set to "0" when not used. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. When the vibration increases in motor stop (ex. in orientation stop) when the machine vibration suppression filter is operated by SP070, operate the machine vibration suppression filter at a speed of this parameter or more. When set to "0", this is validated for all speeds. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "14" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. Not used. Set "0".
DEC
0 Hz
100 to 3000
DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC * *
0 r/min 0 r/min 0 r/min 0 % 0 0 r/min
0 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 32767 0 to 1000 32768 to 32767 0 to 32767
DEC DEC DEC
14 0 0 0
0 to 63 0 to 9 0 to 32767
III - 21
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name Fixed control constant Fixed control constant
Details This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. Not used. Set "0". Set the minimum value of variable torque limit at deceleration.
TYP CNG DEC DEC * *
Standard setting
Speed control
SP081 LMCA SP082 LMCB
Tolerable setting range 0 1/256-fold 0 to 1024 Unit 0 1/256-fold 0 to 1024
SP083 to SP086 SP087 DIQM Target value of DEC variable torque limit magnification at deceleration SP088 DIQN Speed for starting Set the speed where the torque limit value at deceleration DEC change of variable starts to change. torque limit magnification at Torque limit deceleration
0 75 %
0 to 150
3000 r/min
0 to 32767
Speed
1) When using the high-speed rotation (10000r/min or higher) specifications motor, and occurrence of the "AL32" (overcurrent) or "AL75" (overvoltage) alarm is not improved by changing the SP067 (VIGWA) to SP069 (VING) setting values, decrement the SP087 (DIQM) value by "-15" at a time until the alarms no longer occur. 2) If the above problems are not occurring, and the deceleration time is longer than the acceleration time, change the SP087 (DIQM) value as indicated in the following flow chart. Adjust the deceleration time so that it is the same as the acceleration time. Note 1) Make this adjustment using the H gears for a machine with gears, and with the H coil for a coil changeover motor. Measure the time with the speedometer output (CN9 No. 9 pin).
III - 22
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name
Details
TYP CNG
Standard setting
Unit
Tolerable setting range
Speed control
Set SP087 to 75 and SP088 to 3000

Measure the acceleration/ deceleration waveform with the spindle maximum speed command
1.1Ta<Td SP87(+5)
0.95Ta<Td
1.1Ta<Td SP87(-5)
0.95Ta<Td
Set this value for SP087. Note 2) The following apply in the above flow chart. Ta: Acceleration time Tb: Deceleration time
Motor speed Motor maximum speed Time
Speedometer output waveform
SP089 to SP090 SP091 OFSN Motor PLG offset (SRN) SP092 OFSI Motor PLG offset (SRI)
SP093
Not used. Set "0". Set the PLG offset for motor forward run. Normally, set DEC this to "0". Set the PLG offset for motor reverse run. Set "200" when DEC using the Mitsubishi complete motor, and "0" when using the built-in motor. Set "0" if the complete motor was manufactured after December 1997, and is indicated as "N-PLG" on the motor fan cover. Not used. Set "0".
* *
0 0 Complete Motor = 200 Built-in Motor = 0
2048 to 2047 2048 to 2047
III - 23
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name
Details
TYP CNG
Standard setting
Unit
Speed control
SP094 LMAV
SP095 VFAV SP096 EGAR
Load meter output Set the load meter output filter time constant. If this value DEC filter is large, the ripple during a constant load meter output will decrease, but the transient responsiveness will drop. The time constant will be 100ms when "0" is set. Fixed control This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" DEC constant unless otherwise specified. Encoder gear ratio Set the spindle end and encoder gear ratio. This DEC parameter can be set only when the spindle speed is faster (deceleration specifications) than the encoder. Parameter setting Deceleration rate "0" 1:1 "1" 1:2 "2" 1:4 "3" 1:8 "4" 1 : 16 Orientation specification HEX
0 2ms
0 0
0 to 4 0 to 4
Orientation control
SP097 SPEC0
Select the orientation specifications with bit correspondence. Refer to section (2) for details. SP098 VGOP Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain proportional item for orientation. A proportional item large value will increase the responsiveness, but will for orientation cause the vibration and noise to increase. (Practical setting range: 30 to 200) SP099 VGOI Speed loop gain Set the speed loop integral gain for orientation. integral item for Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP098 (VGOP) is orientation approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.) SP100 VGOD Speed loop gain Set the speed loop advance/delay gain for orientation. A delay advance large value will increase the impact responsiveness, but item in orientation will cause the deviation between the orientation stop mode position from forward run to the orientation stop position from reverse run to increase. PI control is applied when "0" is set. Use this setting when the machine has a high frictional torque or when the inconsistency in orientation stop position is to be decreased. If the spindle is to be fixed mechanically during orientation stop when "0" is set, input a torque limit signal when fixing. Set this to "15" unless there is any particular problem. SP101 DINP Orientation This is valid when SP097 (SPEC0) -bit2 is set to "1". dummy in-position If a value larger than the normal in-position width (SP004: width OINP) is input here, the ATC time will be shortened so it will appear that orientation is completed sooner. If this value is too large, ATC operation may start before the spindle position reaches the ATC position. Carefully confirm the operation before using this parameter. SP102 OODR Excessive error Set the excessive error width for detecting the excessive value in error alarm during orientation. orientation mode Normally, set this to "32767". The excessive error alarm will not be output when "0" is set. SP103 FTM Positioning Set the time for forcibly turning OFF the index positioning complete OFF complete signal after the indexing start signal separately time timer from the orientation complete signal during indexing operation. SP104 TLOR Torque limit value Set the torque limit value for orientation stop. for orientation The 30-minute rating is equivalent to 100%. servo locking If the external torque limit signal is input during orientation stop, the external torque limit value will have the priority. Use this to mechanically fix the spindle during orientation stop when the machine's frictional torque is small and the inconsistency in orientation stop position is small. SP105 IQGO Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque magnification for amount) for orientation. orientation 1 "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold). Change this parameter value when there is vibration during orientation stop which cannot be eliminated even by changing the SP001 (PGM), SP002 (PGE), SP098 (VGOP) or SP099 (VGOI) settings. 1) When there is fine vibration in the frequency Decrease the setting value. 2) When there is fine vibration in the low frequency Increase the setting value. When changing this parameter, always change the SP106 (IDGO) value to the same value. (Practical setting range: 50 to 300) SP106 IDGO Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation magnification for amount) for orientation. orientation 2 Refer to SP105 (IQGO) for details on setting.
0000
0000 to FFFF
DEC
63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
16 1/16
0 to 2880
DEC
32767 1/4 pulse 0 to 32767 (1 pulse =0.088)
DEC
200 ms
0 to 10000
DEC
100 %
0 to 120
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
III - 24
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name Deceleration rate 2 in orientation mode Deceleration rate 3 in orientation mode Deceleration rate 4 in orientation mode
Details Set the deceleration rate for orientation in respect to gear 01. Set this to use the shortest orientation time for each gear. The value set in SP006 (CSP) is applied when "0" is set. Set the deceleration rate for orientation in respect to gear 10. The setting method is the same as SP107 (CSP2). Set the deceleration rate for orientation in respect to gear 11. The setting method is the same as SP107 (CSP2). Not used. Set "0". If the pulse miss value during orientation stop exceeds this setting, the alarm "5C" will occur. (Set 0 to invalidate.) The orientation start memo setting must always be invalidated when this parameter is set to a value other than "0". (Set SP038 (SFNC6) bit6 to "0".) The following equation applies when using this setting. SP114 setting value SP004 setting value/16/(360/4096) + 20, or set a multiple of 4 larger or equal to the value calculated with the right side when using PLG orientation. If SP097 (SPECO) -bit4 is set to "1", the maximum spindle speed for indexing is set here. Not used. Set "0". Set a value here when using a machine with large GD2, and the motor continues to run when orientation is executed from the stopped state, or if it takes a long time for orientation to stop. Normally set this to "0". Set the number of times to retry orientation when an orientation pulse miss occurs. This parameter is invalid when SP114 (OPER) is set to "0". Alarm "A9" will appear while retrying orientation, and alarm "5C" will appear if there is a pulse miss even after the designated number of retries. Set the orientation position loop gain for the H coil when using the coil changeover motor. Set the magnification in respect to SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE), using "256" as 1-fold. The magnification will also be 1-fold when "0" is set. This is used to shorten the orientation time for each coil. However, normally the time is adjusted with SP121 (MPCSH). Use this parameter when the time cannot be adjusted sufficiently with SP121. Set the orientation position loop gain for the L coil when using the coil changeover motor. The setting method is the same as SP119 (MPGH).
TYP CNG DEC *
Standard setting
Unit
Orientation control
SP107 CSP2
SP108 CSP3
DEC
0 to 1000
SP109 CSP4
DEC
0 to 1000
SP110 to SP113 SP114 OPER Orientation pulse miss check value
DEC
0 360/ 4096
0 to 32767
SP115 OSP2 SP116 SP117 ORUT
Index clamp speed Orientation changeover speed reach range Number of orientation retries
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
SP118 ORCT
DEC
0 time
0 to 100
SP119 MPGH
Orientation position loop gain H coil magnification
DEC
0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
SP120 MPGL
Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification SP121 MPCSH Orientation deceleration rate H coil magnification
DEC
0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
When using the coil changeover motor, set the deceleration rate for orientation with the H coil. Set the magnification in respect to SP006 (CSP), using "256" as 1-fold. The magnification will also be 1-fold when "0" is set. This is used to shorten the orientation time for each coil. SP122 MPCSL Orientation When using the coil changeover motor, set the deceleration rate L deceleration rate for orientation with the L coil. coil magnification The setting method is the same as SP121 (MPCSH). SP123 MGD0 Magnetic sensor This parameter is used for adjusting the operation during output peak value magnetic sensor orientation. Set the peak value of the magnetic sensor output. If the gap between the sensor and magnet is small, set a large value. If the gap is large, set a small value. If the operation stops just before the stop point during magnetic sensor orientation, change this parameter so that the target point is reached. Use the standard setting if there are no problems. SP124 MGD1 Magnetic sensor This parameter is used for adjusting the operation during linear zone width magnetic sensor orientation. Set the width of the magnetic sensor linear zone. If the installation radius of the magnet is large, set a small value. If the radius is small, set a large value. Use the standard setting if there are no problems during orientation.
DEC
0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
DEC
0 1/256-fold 0 to 2560
DEC
Standard magnetizing element = 542 Small magnetizing element = 500 Standard magnetizing element = 768 Small magnetizing element = 440
0 to 10000
DEC
0 to 10000
III - 25
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name Magnetic sensor switching point
Details This parameter is used for adjusting the operation during magnetic sensor orientation. Set the distance from the target stop point for changing the position feedback to magnesensor output. Normally, a value that is approximately half of SP124 (MGDI) is set.
TYP CNG DEC *
Standard setting
Unit
Orientation control
SP125 MGD2
SP126 to SP127 SP128 VRFB Speed command specifications
Position control
SP129 PFBC
Position feedback polarity
SP130 VGHP1 Speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 1 SP131 VGHI1 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 1 SP132 VGHD1 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 1
SP133 HPYV1
Variable excitation rate for position control mode 1
SP134 VCGH1
SP135 VCSH1
Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 1 Variable speed Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain loop proportional proportional item for position control mode 1. gain change start speed for position Proportional gain control mode 1
SP130 SP130(SP134/100)
Not used. Set "0". Designate the number of valid bits in the speed command. Setting value "0": All 32 bits of the speed command are valid Setting value "1": The high-order 19 bits are valid Set the direction to count the position feedback returned to TOSNUC. Setting value "0": Count up with spindle CW rotation Setting value "1": Count up with spindle CCW rotation Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 1. The responsiveness will improve when the value is increased, but the vibration and noise will also increase. (Practical setting range: 30 to 200) Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 1. Normally, this is set so that the ratio to SP130 (VGHP1) is approximately constant. (Approx. 1:1 with setting values.) Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 1. A large value will increase the impact responsiveness, but will cause the stop positions to deviate. PI control is applied when "0" is set. Use this setting when the machine has a high frictional torque or when the inconsistency in orientation stop position is to be decreased. If the spindle is to be fixed mechanically during orientation stop when "0" is set, input a torque limit signal when fixing. Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 1. If the gear noise and vibration, etc., are large, set a small value. However, this will cause the responsiveness to drop. Increase the value a high response is required at low speeds. Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP130 (VGHP1) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 1. Normally, set this to "100".
DEC
Standard magnetizing element = 384 Small magnetizing element = 220 0 0
0 to 1
DEC
0 to 1
DEC
63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
50 %
0 to 100
DEC
100 %
0 to 100
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
Speed SP135 SP017
SP136 IQGH1 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 1 SP137 IDGH1 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 1 SP138 to SP139 SP140 VGHP2 Speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 2 SP141 VGHI2 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 2
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 1. "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold). Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 1. "100" is equivalent to 100% (1-fold). Not used. Set "0". Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1). Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1).
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
0 63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
III - 26
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name
Details Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1). Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1). Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1). Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
TYP CNG DEC
Standard setting
SP142 VGHD2 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 2 SP143 HPYV2 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 2 SP144 VCGH2 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 2 SP145 VCSH2 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 2 SP146 IQGH2 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 2 SP147 IDGH2 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 2 SP148 to SP149 SP150 VGHP3 Speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 3 SP151 VGHI3 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 3 SP152 VGHD3 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 3 SP153 HPYV3 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 3 SP154 VCGH3 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 3 SP155 VCSH3 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 3 SP156 IQGH3 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 3 SP157 IDGH3 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 3 SP158 to SP159 SP160 VGHP4 Speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 4 SP161 VGHI4 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 4 SP162 VGHD4 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 4 SP163 HPYV4 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 4
Position control
Tolerable setting range 15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000 Unit
50 %
0 to 100
100 %
0 to 100
0 r/min
0 to 32767
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1). Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 2. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1). Not used. Set "0". Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1). Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1). Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1). Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1). Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1). Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
100 %
0 to 1000
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
0 63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
50 %
0 to 100
DEC
100 %
0 to 100
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1). Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 3. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1). Not used. Set "0". Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1). Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1). Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1). Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1).
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
0 63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
50 %
0 to 100
III - 27
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name
Details Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1). Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
TYP CNG DEC
Standard setting
Unit
SP164 VCGH4 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 4 SP165 VCSH4 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 4 SP166 IQGH4 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 4 SP167 IDGH4 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 4 SP168 to SP169 SP170 VGHP5 Speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 5 SP171 VGHI5 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 5 SP172 VGHD5 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 5 SP173 HPYV5 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 5 SP174 VCGH5 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 5 SP175 VCSH5 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 5 SP176 IQGH5 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 5 SP177 IDGH5 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 5 SP178 to SP179 SP180 VGHP6 Speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 6 SP181 VGHI6 Speed loop gain integral item for position control mode 6 SP182 VGHD6 Speed loop gain delay/advance item for position control mode 6 SP183 HPYV6 Variable excitation rate for position control mode 6 SP184 VCGH6 Variable speed loop proportional gain target value for position control mode 6
Position control
100 %
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1). Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 4. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1). Not used. Set "0". Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1). Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1). Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1). Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1). Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1). Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
0 63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
50 %
0 to 100
DEC
100 %
0 to 100
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1). Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 5. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1). Not used. Set "0". Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1). Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1). Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1). Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for the position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1). Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1).
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
0 63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
15 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
50 %
0 to 100
DEC
100 %
0 to 100
III - 28
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name
Details Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain proportional item for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1).
TYP CNG DEC
Standard setting
Unit
Others
SP185 VCSH6 Variable speed loop proportional gain change start speed for position control mode 6 SP186 IQGH6 Current loop gain magnification 1 for position control mode 6 SP187 IDGH6 Current loop gain magnification 2 for position control mode 6 SP188 to SP189 SP190 to SP191 SP192 FNC0 STP function selection
Position control
0 r/min
Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque amount) for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1). Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation amount) for position control mode 6. The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1).
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
SP193 SP194 SE2R
SP195 SE2T
SP197 to SP199 SP200 VGHP7
SP201 VGHI7
SP202 VGHD7
SP203 HPYV7
SP204 VCGH7
SP205 VCSH7
SP206 IQGH7
SP207 IDGH7
Not used. Set "0". Not used. Set "0". Select the Z phase signal output from the CN8 No. 4 pin (SYZ) and No. 14 pin (SYZ*). Setting value "0": Output the Z phase of the detector used for orientation. (Output the magnetic sensor's linear zone signal when using a magnetic sensor.) Setting value "4": Output the PLG's Z phase signal only during magnetic sensor orientation. When using other orientation detectors, the output is the same as when "0" is set. Not used. Set "0". Excessive speed Set the range for detecting the excessive speed deviation deviation 2 2 alarm as a ratio in respect to the command speed. detection range Note that even if the ratio is less than 45r/min at the motor speed, the alarm will be detected at 45r/min. Set "0" to invalidate this function. Excessive speed Set the time to output the excessive deviation 2 alarm deviation 2 after the difference of the speed command and actual detection time speed exceeds the above SP194 (SE2R) setting value. The alarm will be output instantly if "0" is set. Not used. Set "0". Speed loop gain Set the speed loop proportional gain for position control proportional item mode 7. for position control The setting method is the same as SP130 (VGHP1). mode 7 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop integral gain for the position control integral item for mode 7. position control The setting method is the same as SP131 (VGHI1). mode 7 Speed loop gain Set the speed loop gain delay/advance gain for position delay/advance control mode 7. item for position The setting method is the same as SP132 (VGHD1). control mode 7 Variable excitation Set the minimum value of the variable excitation rate for rate for position the position control mode 7. control mode 7 The setting method is the same as SP133 (HPYV1). Variable speed Set the ratio of the speed loop gain proportional item in loop proportional respect to SP140 (VGHP2) at the maximum speed set in gain target value SP017 (TSP) for the position control mode 7. for position control The setting method is the same as SP134 (VCGH1). mode 7 Variable speed Set the speed to start changing the speed loop gain loop proportional proportional item for position control mode 7. gain change start The setting method is the same as SP135 (VCSH1). speed for position control mode 7 Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (torque magnification 1 for amount) for position control mode 7. position control The setting method is the same as SP136 (IQGH1). mode 7 Current loop gain Set the magnification of the current loop gain (excitation magnification 2 for amount) for position control mode 7. position control The setting method is the same as SP137 (IDGH1). mode 7
DEC
0 0 0
-32778 to 32777
DEC
0 0 %
0 to 100
DEC
0 ms
0 to 3000
DEC
0 63 rad/s
0 to 1000
DEC
60 1/10rad/s 0 to 1000
DEC
15 1/10rad/s 0 to1000
DEC
50 %
0 to 100
DEC
100 %
0 to 100
DEC
0 r/min
0 to 32767
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
DEC
100 %
0 to 1000
III - 29
Class
No.
Abbrev.
Name
Details Not used. Set "0". This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. Not used. Set "0". This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi. Set to "0" unless otherwise specified. Not used. Set "0". Set the motor speed at which to output the speedometer's full scale voltage. The speed set in SP017 (TSP) is applied when "0" is set. Set the full scale voltage for the load meter output. Approx. 10V will be output when "0" is set.
TYP CNG
Standard setting
Unit
Tolerable setting range
Motor constants
SP208 to SP224 SP225 OXKPH Fixed control constant SP227 OXKPL Fixed control constant SP227 OXVKP Fixed control constant SP228 OXVKI Fixed control constant SP229 OXSFT Fixed control constant SP230 to SP241 SP242 Vavx Fixed control constant SP243 UTTM Fixed control constant SP244 OPLP Fixed control constant SP245 PGHS Fixed control constant SP247 to SP248 SP249 SMO Speedometer full scale voltage output speed SP250 LMO Load meter output full scale adjustment 2 SP251~SP252 SP253 DA1NO D/A output channel 1 data number SP254 DA2NO D/A output channel 2 data number SP255 DA1MP D/A output channel 1 magnification SP257 DA2MP D/A output channel 2 magnification SP257 RPM Motor constants to to (H) SP320 BSD
DEC DEC DEC DEC DEC
* * * * *
0 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570 0 1/257-fold 0 to 2570 0 370 /4097 0 0 r/min 0 ms 0 1/4097 0 0 0 r/min 0 to 2048
DEC DEC DEC DEC
* * * *
0 to 32777 0 to 1000 0 to 4097 0 to 1
DEC
0 to 32777
DEC
0 V
0 to 10
SP321 RPML to to SP384 BSDL
Not used. Set "0". Set the output data No. for the 1st channel (CN9 - pin 9) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0". Set the output data No. for the 2nd channel (CN9 - pin 19) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0". Set the output magnification of the 1st channel (CN9 -pin 9) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0". Set the output magnification of the 2nd channel (CN9 -pin 19) of the D/A output function. Always set this to "0". Set this parameter in the following cases. 1) When using the standard motor with the wide range output specifications and base slide function (when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "0", and SP035(SFNC3)-bit0 or bit2 is set to "1"), set the values from SP314 (SPO) to SP320 (BSD). 2) When using the 1-amplifier 2-motor function, and when using a general-purpose motor for the sub-motor (when SP033 (SFNC1)-bit 2 is set to "1", and SP034 (SFNC2)-bit1 is set to "1"), set the values from SP301 (NPM) to SP311 (NEV3). 3) When using a special motor without coil changeover (electronic output changeover) specifications (when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1" and bit2 is set to "0"), set the values from SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD). 4) When using the coil changeover (electronic output changeover) specifications motor (when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1", and bit2 is set to "1"), set the H coil (high-speed output) motor constants in SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD). This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi, and must not be changed by the user. Motor constant (L) Set this parameter when using the coil changeover motor (electronic output changeover motor). (When SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 is set to "1" and bit2 is set to "1".) Set the L coil (low-speed output) motor constants for the coil changeover motor (electronic output changeover motor). This parameter is determined by Mitsubishi, and must not be changed by the user.
DEC
0 0
32778 to 32777 32778 to 32777
DEC
DEC
0 1/257-fold 32778 to 32777 0 1/257-fold 32778 to 32777 0000 0000 to FFFF
DEC
HEX
HEX
0000
0000 to FFFF
III - 30
(2) Details of bit correspondence parameters

No. Abbrev. F
poff
Details E
hzs
TYP 7
pyoff
SP033 SFNC1
C
ront
9
pycal
2
sftk
1
dflt
0
la2m
HEX setting
[1a2m] [dflt] [sftk]
1-amplifier 2-motor function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Default motor (0: Main/1: Sub) FR-TK unit validity (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[pyoff]
Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[pycal]
Loss reduction function during high-speed rotation (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[ront] [hzs] [poff] Note) SP034 SFNC2 F
Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Motor zero speed high-speed detection (0: Invalid/1: Valid) CV contactor holding at TOSNUC power OFF (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi. E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
HEX setting
mkc2 mkch invm mts1
[mtsl] [invm] [mkch] [mkc2] Note)
Motor constant (0: Standard/1: Special) General-purpose motor function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Coil changeover function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
SP035 SFNC3
0
hwid
lbsd hbsd lwid
HEX setting
[hwid] [lwid] [hbsd] [lbsd]
High-speed coil wide range outputting (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Low-speed coil wide range outputting (0: Invalid/1: Valid) High-speed coil base sliding (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Low-speed coil base sliding (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
III - 31
No.
Abbrev. F E D C B A 9
Details 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
plg1 dslm dssm enc2 enc1 mag2 mag1 plg2
TYP
HEX setting
SP037 SFNC4
Set the control method for when using the 1-amplifier 2-motor function [plg1] Motor 1 PLG (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [plg2] Motor 2 PLG (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [mag1] Motor 1 magnetic sensor (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [mag2] Motor 2 magnetic sensor (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [enc1] Motor 1 encoder (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [enc2] Motor 2 encoder (0: Valid/1: Invalid) [dssm] [dslm] SP037 SFNC5 F
splg
Speedometer output (0: Output/1: Do not output) Load meter output (0: Output/1: Do not output) E D C B A 9 8 7 7 5 4 3 2 1 0
HEX setting
dplg ospcl
noplg nsno nosg
plgo mago enco
Set the orientation position detector, etc. [enco] Encoder (1024p/rev) orientation [mago] Magnetic sensor orientation [plgo] Motor built-in encoder (PLG) orientation Note: Do not set two or more of bits 0 to 2 to "1" simultaneously. [nosg] [nsno] [noplg] No-signal detection type (0: Constant monitor/1: Only during orientation) No-signal detection (0: Valid/1: Invalid) Constant monitoring of PLG Z phase no-signal (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[ospcl] [dplg] [splg] Note) SP038 SFNC7 F

oplp
Orientation changeover speed limit value (0: Motor end/1: Spindle end) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi. E
lmx
D
iqsv
7
vfbs
7
orm
4
tdn
3
plg2
0
alty
dcsn lmnp
HEX setting
[alty]
Decelerate to stop at alarm (0: Invalid/1: Valid) ... Only for specific alarms
[plg2] [tdn] [orm] [vfbs]
A and B phase pulse output (CN8) signal 2-fold (0: Invalid/1: Valid) ... Excluding during encoder orientation Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Orientation start memo (0: Invalid/1: Valid) ... Refer to Note 1. Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[lmnp] [dcsn] [iqsv] [lmx] [oplp] Note) Note 1)
Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Dual cushion during acceleration (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Open loop operation (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
When validated, if orientation is executed after the power is turned ON or after stopping from the second or following orientation after coil changeover, the operation will stop within one rotation. Note that this applies when all of the following conditions are satisfied. 1) Encoder (1024p/rev) or PLG orientation specifications 2) Gear ratio 1:1 with no gear transmission 3) Orientation rotation direction is PRE mode 4) Orientation changeover speed limit value SP005 (OSP) setting is "0"
III - 32
No.
Abbrev. F E D
ksft
Details C
gcgh
TYP 7 5
fdir
SP097 SPECO
9
zdir
4
oscl
0
odi1
ostp orze
vg8x mdir
pyfx dmin odi2
HEX setting
[odi1] [odi2]
[dmin] [pyfx] [pyfx] [fdir] [mdir] [vg8x]
Set the orientation rotation direction with a 2-bit combination. 0: Previous (orientation from direction rotating in speed control) 1: Orientation from motor forward run direction 2: Orientation from motor reverse run direction 3: Setting prohibited Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Variable excitation rate minimum value 50% during orientation stop (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Speed clamp during indexing (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Encoder detector polarity (0: (+)/1: ()) Magnetic sensor detector polarity (0: (+)/1: ()) Speed gain scale 1/8-fold at torque limit input ON during orientation stop (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid)
[zdir]
[gcgh] [ksft] [orze] [ostp] Note)
Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Special function (0: Invalid/1: Valid) Set the special function to "0" unless instructed by Mitsubishi.
III - 33
(3) Details of drive unit capacity, motor type and power supply type selection
No. Abbrev. Details SP039 ATYP Select the capacity of the drive unit in use.
Setting value 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0007 0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 Drive unit type MDS-C1-SPT-075 MDS-C1-SPT-15 MDS-C1-SPT-22 MDS-C1-SPT-37 MDS-C1-SPT-55 MDS-C1-SPT-75 MDS-C1-SPT-110 MDS-C1-SPT-150 MDS-C1-SPT-185 MDS-C1-SPT-220 MDS-C1-SPT-260 MDS-C1-SPT-300 MDS-B-SPT-370 MDS-B-SPT-450 MDS-C1-SPT-04 MDS-B-SPT-550 HEX setting
TYP
HEX setting
SP040 MTYP
Set the motor being used. This parameter is valid only when SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 = "0".
Note 1) The setting value is the same even when "M" (PLG with Z phase) is attached to the end of the following motor model. Note 2) Even if "Z" (high-speed specifications) is attached to the end of the following motor model, the setting value is the same if the maximum rotation speed is less than that indicated below. If the maximum speed is higher than the following values, the special motor setting SP034 (SFNC2)-bit0 must be set to "1", and values must be set in SP257 (RPM) to SP320 (BSD). Setting value 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0007 0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0017 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B 001C 001D 001E Motor type SJ-2.2A SJ-3.7A SJ-5.5A SJ-7.5A SJ-11A SJ-15A SJ-18.5A SJ-22A SJ-27A SJ-30A Maximum speed (rpm) 10000 10000 8000 8000 7000 7000 7000 4500 4500 4500 Corresponding drive unit type MDS-C1-SPT-22 MDS-C1-SPT-37 MDS-C1-SPT-55 MDS-C1-SPT-75 MDS-C1-SPT-110 MDS-C1-SPT-150 MDS-C1-SPT-185 MDS-C1-SPT-220 MDS-C1-SPT-260 MDS-C1-SPT-300
SJ-N0.75A SJ-N1.5A SJ-N2.2A SJ-N3.7A SJ-N5.5A SJ-N7.5A
10000 10000 10000 10000 8000 8000
MDS-C1-SPT-075 MDS-C1-SPT-15 MDS-C1-SPT-22 MDS-C1-SPT-37 MDS-C1-SPT-55 MDS-C1-SPT-75
SJ-J2.2A SJ-J3.7A SJ-J5.5A SJ-J7.5A
10000 10000 8000 8000
MDS-C1-SPT-22 MDS-C1-SPT-37 MDS-C1-SPT-55 MDS-C1-SPT-75
III - 34
No.
Abbrev. Setting value 0000 0004 0007 0008 0011 0015 0019 0022 0026 0030 0137 0145 0155 Note 1)
Details Select the capacity of the power supply unit to be used. Power supply unit model No connection MDS-C1-CV-37 MDS-C1-CV-55 MDS-C1-CV-75 MDS-C1-CV-110 MDS-C1-CV-150 MDS-C1-CV-185 MDS-C1-CV-220 MDS-C1-CV-260 MDS-C1-CV-300 MDS-C1-CV-370 MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550
TYP
HEX setting
SP041 PTYP
Note 2) Note 3)
Always set "0" for the drive unit which is not connected to the power supply unit. (When three or more spindle drive units are connected to one power supply unit.) Set "0037" when connecting only a SPT-300 or smaller capacity drive unit to CV-370. When using external emergency stop value, add 40 to the above setting value. Example) Set as follows when using external emergency stop with CV-260: 0026 + 0040 = 0066
III - 35
(2) D/A output functions (a) Outline The D/A output function is mounted in the standard system in the MDS-C1-SP. Using this D/A output function, the drive unit status and each data can be confirmed. (b) Hardware specifications 2 channels 8 bit 0 to +10V Output pin CH 1: CN9-9 pin CH 2: CN9-19 pin GND: CN9-1.11 pin (c) Parameters Set the data No. and output magnification of each channel according to the parameters below.
Name SP253 SP254 SP255 SP256 Details D/A channel 1 data No. D/A channel 2 data No. D/A channel 1 output magnification D/A channel 2 output magnification
(d) Output data No. Set the No. of the data to be output in SP253 and SP254. A correlation of the output data and the data No. is shown below.
No. (setting value) 0 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 CH1 Output data Speedometer output Current command Current feedback Speed feedback Position droop low-order Position droop high-order Position F T low-order Maximum speed at 10V When the actual data is 4096, the current command data is regarded as 100%. When the actual data is 4096, the current feedback data is regarded as 100%. Actual data r/min Interpolation units (When the actual data is 23040000, the position droop data is regarded as 360.) Interpolation units/NC communication cycle Interpolation units (When the actual data is 23040000, the position command data is regarded as 360.) Interpolation units (When the actual data is 23040000, the feedback position data is regarded as 360.) Bit correspondence Units CH2 Output data Load meter output Units 120% load at 10V
Position F T high-order Position command low-order Position command high-order Feedback position low-order Feedback position high-order Control input 1 Control input 2 Control input 3 Control input 4 Control output 1 Control output 2 Control output 3 Control output 4
Same as CH1
Bit correspondence
(Note) The % of the current command and current feedback indicate 30min. rating = 100%.
III - 36
(e) Setting the output magnification Set the output magnification in SP255 and SP256. DATA = actual data
SP255 or SP256 256
Using the expression above, (i) Output data other than speedometer output and load meter output carries out the D/A output in Fig. 1. (ii) Speedometer output data and load meter output data carries out the D/A output in Fig. 2. D/A output voltage D/A output voltage
+10V
+10V
+5V
+5V
0V -128 0 +127
DATA
0V 0 +127 +255
DATA
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
(Example 1) Current command, current feedback The data is regarded as 100% when the actual data is 4096. Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below during +120% current feedback. Actual data = 4096 1.2 = 4915 If "256" is set (magnification 1) in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, exceeding the D/A output voltage maximum value. 5V + {4915 1 (5V/128)} = 197V > 10V Therefore, if "6" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible. 5V + {4915 6/256 (5V/128)} = 9.5V < 10V
III - 37
(Example 2) Speed feedback Data unit is r/min. Therefore, at +2000r/min, the motor speed will be output as "2000". If "256" (magnification 1) is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, exceeding the D/A output voltage maximum value. 5V + {2000 1 (5V/128)} = 83.125V > 10V Therefore, if "16" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible. 5V + {2000 16/256 (5V/128)} = 9.88V < 10V (Example 3) Position droop The data unit is r/min. Data is regarded as 100% when the actual data is 4096. Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below during the +0.1 position droop. Actual data = 0.1 23040000/360 = 6400 If "256" (magnification 1) is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, exceeding the D/A output voltage maximum value. 5V + {6400 1 (5V/128)} = 255V > 10V Therefore, if "5" is set in parameter SP255 (SP256), the D/A output voltage will become as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible. 5V + {2000 5/256 (5V/128)} = 9.88V < 10V (Example 4) Confirm the orientation complete signal (ORCF) with the control output 4L. The data unit is bit corresponding data. Refer to the Instruction Manual for the meanings of the control output 4L bit corresponding signals. The orientation complete signal (ORCF) corresponds to the control output 4L/bit 4. Therefore, for example, the actual data is output as shown below when ORCF= ON. bit 4 corresponding actual data = 24 = 16 If "256" is (magnification 1) set in parameter SP255 (SP256), from Fig.1, the D/A output voltage will be as shown below, and data confirmation will be possible. 5V + {16 1 (5V/128)} = 5.625V < 10V Note that, if bits other than bit4 are ON, the current of that bit will be added to the 5.625V shown above, and at the actual ORCF signal measurement will be as shown below, so confirm the changed voltage. (5.625 V 5V) = 0.625 V
III - 38
3.3
Spindle specification parameters screen
The spindle parameters are divided into those transmitted to the spindle drive unit from the NC and those used on the NC side. (1) Parameters transmitted to the spindle drive unit from the NC The 384 parameters shown in section "4.2.(1)" are those transmitted from the NC to the spindle drive unit. (2) Parameters used on NC side Refer to the Toshiba Machine "TOSNUC 888.2" Instruction Manual for details on the parameters used on the NC side.
III - 39
3.4
Spindle monitor screen
Refer to the Toshiba Machine "TOSNUC 888.2" Specifications Manual for details on this screens and contents.
III - 40
3.5
Control input signals
(1) Speed command input

Max. speed
Speed command value
(a) When the speed command value is 0, the motor speed will be 0; and when the speed command value is the maximum value, the motor speed will be the maximum motor speed set in parameter SP017 (TSP). (b) The motor will forward run and reverse run with the forward run and reverse run start commands. (The motor will not rotate with only the speed command value.) (2) Forward run start command (SRN) (a) When SRN is ON, the motor will run in the counterclockwise direction (CCW) from the shaft side according to the commanded speed. (b) When SRN is OFF, the motor will decelerate to a stop, the transistor base interception will be carried out and the motor will stop. (c) The orientation movement will be a priority when the orientation command is input. (3) Reverse run start command (SRI) (a) When SRI is ON, the motor will run in the clockwise direction (CW) from the shaft side according to the commanded speed. (b) When SRI is OFF, the motor will decelerate to a stop, the transistor base interception will be carried out and the motor will stop. (c) The orientation movement will be a priority when the orientation command is input. (4) Torque limit 1, 2, 3 input (TL1, TL2, TL3) (a) The torque limit will temporarily reduce the motor output torque during mechanical spindle orientation or gear shift, etc., and will rotate the motor. (b) The following seven torque limit values can be used according to the combination of the TL1, TL2 and TL3 bit inputs.
TL3 TL2 TL1 Torque limit value
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Torque limit value (%) set with parameter SP021 SP049 SP050 SP051 SP052 SP053 SP054
(Note) % indicates the percentage to the motor 30 min. rating torque.
III - 41
(5) Orientation start command input (ORC) (a) This is the orientation movement start signal. When ORC is ON, the orientation will start regardless of the operation command (SRN, SRI). (b) When ORC is OFF, the motor will start rotating at the commanded speed again if either forward run (SRN) or reverse run (SRI) is input. (c) The orientation movement will be a priority when the orientation command is input. (6) Gear selection command 1, 2 input (GR1, GR2) (a) The spindle gear step for orientation movement or various position control movements is selected. (b) The following four gear steps can be selected according to the combination of the GR1 and GR2 2bit inputs. (c) Do not change the signal while the orientation command or servo ON command is input.
GR2 GR1 Parameters used to set the gear ratio
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1
SP025 (GRA1), SP029 (GRB1) SP026 (GRA2), SP030 (GRB2) SP027 (GRA3), SP031 (GRB3) SP028 (GRA4), SP032 (GRB4)
(7) Index forward run command input (WRN), reverse run command input (WRI) (a) This is the command input for forward run index or reverse run index during multipoint orientation. This will be valid only when the orientation start signal is ON. (b) The forward run index will start from the CCW direction from the motor shaft end and the reverse run index will start from the CW direction. (8) L coil selection command input (LCS) (a) This is the command input signal for selecting the low-speed coil or high-speed coil when changing the coils. (b) The high-speed coil is selected when LCS is OFF, and the low-speed coil is selected when LCS is ON. (9) Sub-motor selection command input (MS) (a) This is the command input signal for selecting the main spindle motor or sub general-purpose motor during the 1-drive unit 2-motor specifications changeover. (b) The main motor is selected when MS is OFF, and the sub-motor is selected when MS is ON. (10) Cutting input (G1) This signal determines whether cutting is being performed during C-axis control. The operation will be determined as cutting when G1 is ON. (11) Spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 input (SC1, SC2, SC3, SC4, SC5) The operation mode during spindle drive unit position control is selected with the bits. The selections shown below are used.
SC5 SC4 SC3 SC2 SC1 Operation mode
0 0 0 0 1 1
1 1 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0 Synchronous tap operation mode 1 0 C-axis operation mode 1 0 Spindle synchronous operation mode 1
(Note) The normal speed operation mode will be entered when bits other than the above are selected. III - 42
~
0
~
1 0
~
0 1
3.6
Control output signals

(a) ZS will turn ON if the actual motor rotation speed drops below the zero speed detection point in regard to the stop command. (b) The signal is output when the above condition is satisfied regardless of the rotation command (SRN, SRI). (c) The minimum output pulse width is about 200ms. (d) The zero speed detection speed is set with parameter SP018 (ZSP) in the range of 1 to 1000r/min.
(1) Zero speed output signal (ZS)
Motor speed
Zero speed detect point: set with parameter within range from 1 to 1000r/min (standard: 50r/min, semi-standard: 25r/min) Output signal
(2) Up-to-speed output signal (US) (a) US will turn ON when the actual motor rotation speed reaches 15% of the commanded speed.
Command speed
Detection range
Output signal
(b) The signal is not output unless either SRN or SRI will turn ON. (c) The signal can be used to verify implementation of forward run (M03) or reverse run (M04) command. (d) If the reverse run command will turn ON, the motor will start deceleration. The US signal will turn OFF, and after confirming that the reached signal will turn ON, the reverse run command will be completed.
III - 43
Forward run Command
Reverse run Forward run
Motor speed 0
Reverse run Output signal
(3) Speed detection output (SD) (a) SD will turn ON when the speed drops below the speed set in parameter SP020 (SDTS). (b) The SD signal will turn ON when the motor speed's absolute value drops below the set detection level regardless of the run command (SRN, SRI).
Speed detection level Motor speed
Output signal
(4) Orientation complete output (ORCF) ORCF will turn ON when the spindle position is currently within the in-position range set with parameter SP004 (OINP) during orientation. (5) Current detect output (CD) CD will turn ON when the current value is 110% or more than the rated current. (6) Forward run starting command output (SRNA) This is the answer output to the forward run start command input (SRN). (7) Reverse run starting command output (SRIA) This is the answer output to the reverse run start command input (SRI). (8) Torque limiting 1, 2, 3 output (TL1A, TL2A, TL3A) This is the answer output to the torque limit 1, 2, 3 input (TL1, TL2, TL3). (9) Orientation starting command output (ORCA) This is the answer output to the orientation start command input (ORC).
III - 44
(10) Gear selecting command 1, 2, 3 output (GR1A, GR2A, GR3A) This is the answer output to the gear selection command 1, 2, 3 input (GR1, GR2, GR3). (11) Index forward run command output (WRNA), reverse run command output (WRIA) This is the answer output to the index forward run command (WRN) and reverse run command (WRI). (12) L coil selection command output (LCSA) This is the answer output to the L coil selection command input (LCS). (13) Sub-motor selection command output (MSA) This is the answer output to the sub-motor selection command (MS). (14) Synchronous speed match output (SYSA) SYSA will turn ON when the movement from the speed operation mode to the spindle synchronous operation mode becomes possible during spindle synchronous operation. (15) Coil changeover output (MKC) MKC will turn ON for a set time when changing over from the L coil to the H coil or the H coil to the L coil during coil changeover. (16) Index positioning complete output (WRCF) WRCF will turn ON when indexing is completed during indexing. (17) Drive unit warning output (DWN) DWN will turn ON when any warning occurs in the spindle drive unit. (18) Alarm output (ALM) ALM will turn ON when any alarm occurs in the spindle drive unit. (19) Z-phase passed output (ZFIN) ZFIN will turn ON when the Z-phase is passed for the first time after the servo will turn ON during position control. (20) Position loop in-position output (INP) INP will turn ON when the current position is within the in-position range set with parameters during positioning other than orientation. INP will turn OFF when the servo turns OFF. (21) Spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 output (SC1A, SC2A, SC3A, SC4A, SC5A) This is the answer output to the spindle control mode selection command 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 input (SC1, SC2, SC3, SC4, SC5).
III - 45
3.7
Meter outputs
Speedometer Full scale: 10V
Load meter Full scale: 10V
(1) Speedometer output (a) The following specification is recommended for speedometer. (i) Model : YM-8G DC voltmeter (Mitsubishi) (ii) Rating : 10VDC full scale (iii) Internal impedance : About 10k (b) +10VDC is output at the motor max speed, regardless of rotation direction.
Max. speed
Motor speed
(2) Load meter output (a) The following specification is recommended for load meter. (i) Model : YM-8G DC voltmeter (Mitsubishi) (ii) Rating : 10VDC full scale (iii Internal impedance : About 10k (iv) Scale
Red zone
III - 46
(b) Reading of load meter is percent (%) of load to the rated motor output. The relationship between motor output capacity [kW] and load meter reading [r/min] is as follows:
Motor output capacity (kW)
Overload zone (1 min.) 50%ED (

15 min. ) rating 30 min.
Load meter 120% Load meter 100%
Continuous rating area
Load meter Cont. rating 100% 30 min. rating
III - 47
3.8
Output interface
Open emitter output Output transistor rating M54630P TR array Tolerable voltage : 24VDC or less Tolerable current : 50mA or less (per output)
Coil changeover output signal Spindle/C-axis changeover output signal
<Spindle drive unit>
<MHE90K (AD converter)>
(Note 1) Connect the spindle/C-axis changeover output signal only when using the MHE90K detector. (Note 2) The changeover circuit configuration for coil changeover is as shown below.
<Spindle drive unit> <AC spindle motor>
Control section
The relays, contactors, cables, etc., for the spindle drive unit and AC spindle motor that are not enclosed in the bold line must be prepared by the machine manufacturer. The relay (RA) must be connected in parallel with the flywheel diode; and the contactors (MC1, MC2) must be connected in parallel with the CR surge absorber coil. During low-speed coil selection ................ connection (Turn MC1 ON, MC2 OFF) During high-speed coil selection............... connection (Turn MC1 OFF, MC2 ON)
III - 48
4. Optional Specifications and Parts

WARNING Always wait at least 15 minutes after turning the power OFF before connecting options or peripheral devices. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks. CAUTION Always use the designated peripheral devices and options. Failure to observe this could lead to faults or fires.
4.1
Orientation specifications (optional)
The following three types of orientation specifications are available: (1) 1-point orientation using magnetic sensor (2) 4096-point orientation using encoder (3) 4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder
4.1.1
1-point orientation using magnetic sensor
(1) Connection Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the magnetic sensor and spindle drive unit. (2) Magnet and detection head installation direction The magnet and detection head should be installed in the specified orientation. Standard type and high-speed standard type ............. The center reference hole of magnet and the reference notch of detection head should come to the same side. Refer to CASE 1 , CASE 2 , CASE 3 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 1 . High-speed small type ............. The reference notch of detection head should be positioned in reference with polarity (N, S) of magnet. Refer to CASE 4 , CASE 5 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 2 . High-speed ring type ............. The reference notch of detection head should be positioned in reference with polarity (N, S) of magnet. Refer to CASE 6 , CASE 7 and UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 3 . CASE 1 Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body. (Circumferential mounting) The reference hole of magnet and the reference notch of detection head should come to the opposite load side, as shown below.
Reference hole
Opposite load side Load side
Opposite load side Reference notch
Load side
Reference hole Reference notch
View from "A"
Magnet is installed on circumferential surface of rotating body. III - 49
CASE 2 (1)
Magnet is installed on the front or back flat surface of rotating body. (Flat mounting) (2) When the magnet is installed on the load side of spindle, the reference hole of magnet and reference notch of detection head should face outward, as shown below.
When the magnet is installed on the opposite load side of spindle, the reference hole of magnet and reference notch of detection head should face inward, as shown below.
Reference Reference hole notch
View from "B"
Reference Reference hole notch
Reference hole
Reference notch
View from "C"
Magnet is installed on the opposite load side.
Magnet is installed on the load side.
CASE 3
In regard to CASE 1 , the magnet and detection head can be changed to the following position as long as the reference hole and reference notch are aligned. With this, normal orientation can be carried out. (However, the parameter SP097 orientation detector installation direction bit must be changed in this case.)
UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 1 If the magnet reference hole and detection head reference notch are not aligned, intense vibration will occur on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Reference hole
Reference hole Reference notch Reference notch
III - 50
CASE 4
Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body. (Circumferential mounting) The detection head reference notch should be on the opposite load side and the magnet should be installed in the polarity shown below.
Opposite load side
Load side
Reference View from "A" notch
Reference notch
Magnet is installed on the circumferential surface of rotating body.
CASE 5
As long as the relation between location of the detection head reference notch and the polarity of the magnet are aligned, the detection head and the magnet can be installed as shown below in CASE 4 , and normal orientation can be carried out. (However, the parameter SP097 orientation detector installation direction bit must be changed in this case.)
Opposite load side
Load side
View from "A"
Reference notch
Reference notch
UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 2 If the detection head reference notch is not aligned properly in reference to polarity of the magnet, intense vibration occurs on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Opposite load side
Load side
Reference View from "A" notch
Reference notch
In this example, polarity (N, S) of magnet is inverse to that in CASE 4 .
III - 51
CASE 6
The detection head reference notch is on the opposite load side of spindle and the polarity of the magnet is as shown below.
Opposite load side Reference notch View from "A"
Load side
Reference notch
CASE 7
As long as the relation between location of detection head reference notch and the polarity of the magnet are aligned, the detection head and the magnet can be installed as shown below in CASE 4 , and normal orientation can be carried out. (However, the parameter SP097 orientation detector installation direction bit must be changed in this case.)
Opposite load side
Load side
View from "A"
Reference notch
Reference notch
UNACCEPTABLE EXAMPLE 3 If the detection head reference notch is not aligned properly in reference to polarity of the magnet, intense vibration occurs on both ends of the magnet, and orientation is impossible.
Opposite load side Reference notch
Load side
View from "A"
Reference notch
In this example, polarity (N, S) of magnet is inverse to that in CASE 4 .
III - 52
Direction of rotation
Spindle
Face A
(40 to 60 permissible) Face A
Magnet Min. gap Tolerable installation error 2 mm Adjustable range 2 mm Reference notch Center
Magnet
Max. gap Head
Mounting plate Reference notch Center
Table 1
BKO-C1810H03 R (Radius) mm 40 50 60 70 Max. gap mm 11.5 0.5 9.5 0.5 8.5 0.5 8.0 0.5 Standard Min. gap mm 2.7 0.5 2.8 0.5 3.0 0.5 3.4 0.5 BKO-C1730H06 Max. gap mm 10 0.5 8 0.5 7 0.5 7 0.5 High-speed standard Min. gap mm 1.22 0.5 1.31 0.5 1.5 0.5 2.38 0.5
Table 2
BKO-C1810H03 R (Radius) mm 40 50 60 70 Gap mm 6 0.5 6 0.5 6 0.5 6 0.5 Standard BKO-C1730H06 High-speed standard Gap mm 5 0.5 5 0.5 5 0.5 5 0.5
Table 3
BKO-C1730H09 R (Radius) mm 40 50 60 70 Max. gap mm 6.25 0.5 6.0 0.5 5.75 0.5 5.5 0.5 High-speed standard Min. gap mm 3.3 0.5 3.7 0.5 3.85 0.5 3.87 0.5
III - 53
(3) Caution on installation of magnet When the magnet is installed to the spindle, pay attention to the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Do not place an intense magnetic source near the magnet. Carefully handle the magnet, avoiding mechanical shock to the magnet. Secure the magnet to the spindle with M4 screws. After the magnet is installed, balance the entire spindle. Align the center of the magnet (between N and S) with the center line of the rotating disk on the spindle. (The position relation should be as shown in CASE 1 to CASE 7 on the previous pages.) (f) Keep the magnet and its peripheral clean from iron particles (iron particles may cause malfunction). (g) Apply lock paint, or other suitable means, to prevent installation screws from becoming loose. (h) If the magnet is installed on a ground rotating disk, demagnetize the disk. (i) Diameter of rotating disk on which the magnet is installed should be within the range from 80mm to 120mm. (j) If rotation speed of the spindle on which the magnet is installed exceeds 6000r/min, use a high-speed type magnet (applicable up to 12000r/min of rotation speed). If rotation speed exceeds 12000r/min, use a ring type magnet. (k) When installing the magnet on a rotating body plane, keep the speed below 6,000r/min.
(4) Caution on installation of sensor Observe the following cautions when installing the sensor. (a) The position relation of the magnet and detection head should follow CASE 1 to CASE 7 . (b) The center line of detection head should be in line with the center of magnet. (c) The gap between the magnet and detection head should be as follows: Table 1 on previous page when using standard magnet and installation CASE 1 or CASE 3 Table 1 on previous page when using high-speed standard magnet and installation CASE 1 or CASE 3 Table 2 on previous page when using standard magnet and installation CASE 2 Table 2 on previous page when using high-speed standard magnet and installation CASE 2 Table 3 on previous page when using high-speed compact magnet and installation CASE 1 or CASE 3 An example of the high-speed ring magnet is shown in the outline drawing in section "4.1.1 (5)". Manufacturing a jig is recommended for mass production. (d) Connector used in preamplifier BKO-C1810 : Oil proof-type BKO-C1730 : Not oil proof-type Install both type at a place not subject to oil. (e) The cable between the preamplifier and the controller should be laid down apart from high-voltage cables. (f) Check the connector wiring, securely engage the receptacle and tighten connector lock screws.
III - 54
(5) Magnetic sensor orientation parts (Optionally supplied parts) Select the combination of the magnetic sensor parts for magnetic sensor orientation from the table below.
Tolerable speed [r/min] 0 to 6000 0 to 12000 0 to 12000 0 to 25000 0 to 25000 0 to 30000 0 to 30000 Combination Model MAGSENSOR BKO-C1810H01 to 3 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.6 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.9 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.11 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.12 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.13 MAGSENSOR BKO-C1730H01.2.14 Preamplifier H01 H01 H01 H01 H01 H01 H01 Sensor Magnet H02 H02 H02 H02 H02 H02 H02 H03 H06 H09 H41 H42 H43 H44
Type Standard High-speed standard High-speed small High-speed ring High-speed ring High-speed ring High-speed ring
Outline dimensions:
Preamplifier H01
2-5.5 hole
Connector (sensor side) For BKO-C1810H01, R04-R-8F is used. For BKO-C1730H01, TRC116-21A10-7F is used.
Connector (controller cable side) Unit side : TRC116-21A10-7M Cable side : TRC116-12A10-7F10.5
Sensor H02
Reference notch
Cable length 500
+100 0
Connector For BKO-C1810H02, R04-R-8M is used. For BKO-C1730H02, TRC116-12A10-7M is used.
III - 55
Magnet
Outline drawings Mass: 40 1.5g
Part Tolerable No. speed [r/min] H03 0 to 6000

Reference hole
H06
0 to 12000
4-4.3 hole
Installation screw: M4 Mass: 14.8 0.7g

2-4.3 hole
H09
0 to 12000
N.P
Installation screw: M4
Spun ring RINGFEDER RFN8006 JK Case Cover 4-F screw Stainless case SUS-303
H41
0 to 25000
Gap 1 0.1
H42
0 to 25000
Sensor head Reference notch
Stop position scale
2-G0.15H On circumference
Polarity (N,S) is indicated on the side wall of cover. Detection head should be installed so that the reference notch of sensor head comes on the case side.
Magnet
DIM IN mm
Dimensions A B C D E F G H JX L
H43
0 to 30000
Model
Mass
(g)
BKO-C1730H11 BKO-C1730H12 BKO-C1730H13 BKO-C1730H14
105 94 78 66
H44
0 to 30000
Reference notch
70H7+0.030 90 0 60H7+0.030 79 0 50H7+0.025 66 0 40H7+0.025 54 0 Spindle Case
28 25 23 20
19 M61.0 17 M50.8 15 M50.8 13 M40.7
5 5 5 5
90 79 66 54
7079 6068 5057 4045
1 1 1 1
10244 7684 4784 3224
G hole Gap L
Tolerance
Caution on installation of H41 to H44

1. Tolerance to shaft dimension should be "h6". 2. 2-G hole can be used for positioning of spindle and magnet. 3. Magnet shall be installed as shown to the left. 4. Misalignment between sensor head and magnetic center line shall be within 2mm. 5. Reference notch of sensor head shall come on the case side.
Cover Spindle clamping screw
Installation of magnet
III - 56
4.1.2
4096-point orientation using encoder
(1) Connection Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit. (2) Installation conditions Mechanical characteristics for rotation a. b. c. d. Inertia Shaft friction torque Shaft angle acceleration Tolerable speed : 0.110-4kgm2 or less : 0.98Nm or less : 104rad/s2 or less : 7,030r/min
Mechanical configuration a. Bearings : Non-lubricated for 100,000 hours or more rotations (at 2,000r/min) Non-lubricated for 20,000 hours or more at 6,000r/min Shaft amplitude : 0.02mm or less at 15mm from end Tolerable load : Thrust direction 10kg (5kg during operation) Radial direction 20kg (10kg during operation) Mass : 1.5kg max Squareness of flange to shaft : 0.05mm or less Flange matching eccentricity : 0.05mm or less
b. c. d. e. f.
Working conditions a. b. c. d. e. Working temperature range Storage temperature range Humidity range Vibration resistance Impact resistance : -5C to +55C : -20C to +85C : 95% RH (at 40C) for 8 hours : 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30 min. : 294.0m/s2 (30G)
III - 57
(3) Handling a. b. Use of a flexible coupling is recommended for the coupling of the encoder and spindle shaft in terms of improving the encoder life and performance. Installation precision The precision shown below should be secured for the encoder installation section engaging section and installation surface sway in order to maximize the coupling life.
Encoder
Coupling
Opposite encoder shaft side
c.
Recommended coupling
Recommendation 1 Manufacturer Model Resonance frequency Position detection error Tolerable speed Misalignment Outline dimensions Core deviation Angle displacement Max. length Max. diameter Tokushu Seiko Model M1 1374Hz 0.8 10
3
Recommendation 2 Eagle FCS38A 3515Hz 1.2 103 10000 r/min 0.16mm 1.5 33mm 38mm
20000r/min 0.7mm 1.5 74.5mm 57mm
Refer to the coupling catalogue for details on the coupling.
III - 58
(4) Encoder orientation parts (Optionally supplied parts) Encoder (1024p/rev)

Encoder model RFH-1024-22-1M-68 RFH-1024-22-1M-68-8
Name plate
Tolerable speed 6000r/min 8000r/min

4-5.4 hole
1.15
3 14.3 15g6
Key way dimensions
Encoder side MS3102A20-29P Cable side MS3106A20-29S
Pin A B C D E F G H J
50g6
Function 1chA 2chZ 1chB Case earth
Pin K L M N P R S
Function 0V
1ch A 2ch Z 1ch B
+5V
III - 59
4.1.3
4096-point orientation using motor built-in encoder
The motor built-in encoder built-in motor with Z-phase signal is required for this specification. This can be used only when the motor and spindle coupling is the direction coupling or when the timing belt with a reduction ratio of 1 is used. (1) Connection Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the signal wires. (2) Installation The encoder is built into the motor so no special detector needs to be installed.
4.1.4
Operation of orientation
(1) Operation modes There are three modes of orientation stop. Desired mode can be selected by setting parameter SPECO. 1. PRE : ........... (a) Spindle approaches the stop position in the direction of on-going rotation. 2. Forward orientation : ........... (b) Spindle approaches the stop position in forward direction of rotation, regardless of direction of on-going rotation. 3. Reverse orientation : ........... (c) Spindle approaches the stop position in the reverse direction of rotation, regardless of direction of on-going rotation.
Speed (Fwd.)
ORC ORCF
Speed (Rev.)
ORC ORCF
(2) Operation sequence (a) When orientation command ORC is given, motor speed changes from the steady run speed to "Position loop changeover speed" and at the same time the multi-point orientation stop position is read. (b) When motor speed reaches the "Position loop changeover speed", control mode changes from speed control to positioning control (position loop gain parameter (Note 1)). ("Position loop changeover speed" is automatically set when position loop gain is specified by parameter.)
III - 60
(c) When control mode changes, distance to the orientation stop position is calculated and the motor is decelerated in the set pattern (specified by parameter CSP) to enter the orientation mode. (d) When the spindle enters the in-position range (set by parameter OINP), "oriented spindle stop complete signal (in-position)" ORCF turns ON. (e) The stop position zero point can be shifted by setting parameter OPST. ( f ) When orientation command (ORC) is removed, the motor is returned to the previously specified run speed.
Motor speed
Stop position command
(Note 1) PGM is used for the magnetic sensor and motor built-in encoder orientation and PGE is used for the encoder orientation. The stopping position according to the encoder installation direction is as shown below:
Case 1
Encoder Motor Belt Arrow A Arrow A
Case 2
Installation direction
Looking from arrow A
Looking from arrow A
Forward run
Reverse run
Forward run
Reverse run
Normal orientation
III - 61
(3) Diagram of relation of parameters for orientation
Position control block
Speed control block
is the parameter name.
From CNC or
Delay advance
Power drive unit
Position feedback
Speed feedback
Spindle motor
Encoder Bit 5 or bit 6 Bit 0 to 2 Spindle
Magnetic sensor
III - 62
4.2
Synchronous tap function (option)
There are two types of synchronous tap. Closed type synchronous tap Semi-closed type synchronous tap
4.2.1
Closed type synchronous tap
A position loop can be built up with position signal from an encoder installed on spindle. (Note that position control is carried out by configuring a position loop in the Toshiba Machine CNC "TUSNUC 888.2".) (1) Connection Refer to "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit. (2) Installation of encoder For installation of encoder, refer to the pages related to encoder orientation.
4.2.2
Semi-closed type synchronous tap
A position loop can be built up with position signal from motor built-in encoder. (Note that position control is carried out by configuring a position loop in the Toshiba Machine CNC "TUSNUC 888.2".) A special detector is not required for synchronous tap if the spindle is coupled to the motor shaft directly or through gears. (When belt or timing belt is used, closed type synchronous tap is applicable.) It is also applicable to standard motor having no Z-phase control. (1) Connection No additional connection is required for semi-closed type synchronous tap.
4.2.3
Operation of synchronous tap
The following two operations can be used to enter the synchronous tap operation. (1) Synchronous tap starts after zero point return (2) Synchronous tap starts after deceleration and stop The above operations are controlled with the CNC side, so refer to the CNC Instruction Manual.
III - 63
4.3
4.3.1
C-axis control (optional)

When using encoder (OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC6336H01)
(1) Connection Refer to page "1.4 Configuration" for the connection of the encoder and spindle drive unit. (2) Installation conditions Mechanical characteristics for rotation a. b. c. d. Inertia Shaft friction torque Shaft angle acceleration Tolerable speed : 0.1104kgm2 or less : 0.98Nm or less : 105rad/s2 or less : 7,030r/min
Mechanical configuration a. Bearings : Non-lubricated for 100,000 hours or more rotations (at 2,000r/min) Non-lubricated for 20,000 hours or more at 6,000r/min Shaft amplitude : 0.02mm or less at 15mm from end Tolerable load : Thrust direction 10kg (5kg during operation) Radial direction 20kg (10kg during operation) Mass : 2kg max Squareness of flange to shaft : 0.05mm or less Flange matching eccentricity : 0.05mm or less
b. c. d. e. f.
Working conditions a. b. c. d. e. Working temperature range Storage temperature range Humidity range Vibration resistance Impact resistance : 5C to +55C : 20C to +85C : 95% RH (at 45C) for 8 hours : 5 to 50Hz, total vibration width 1.5mm, each shaft for 30 min. : 294.0m/s2 (30G)
III - 64
(3) Handling a. Installation of encoder Use of a flexible coupling is recommended for the coupling of the encoder and spindle shaft in terms of improving the encoder life and performance. Installation precision The precision shown below should be secured for the encoder installation section engaging section and installation surface sway to secure the coupling life.
b.
Encoder
Coupling
Opposite encoder shaft side
c.
Recommended coupling
Recommendation 1 Manufacturer Tokushu Seiko Model Model M1 Resonance frequency 1374 Hz -3 Position detection error 0.8 10 Tolerable speed 20000 r/min MisCore deviation 0.7 mm alignment Angle displacement 1.5 Max. length 74.5 mm Dimensions Max. diameter 57 mm Refer to the coupling catalogue for details on the coupling. Recommendation 2 Eagle FCS38A 3515 Hz 1.2 10-3 10000 r/min 0.16 mm 1.5 33 mm 38 mm
d.
Cable 1) Consider the following points to allow the encoder to be used to its fullest.
A 4.5V or higher power supply must be secured for the encoder. For example: (i) Increase the +5V, 0V wire size. (ii) Use two or more wires for +5V, 0V. (iii) Keep the cable length as short as possible.
2) Others The encoder is a precision device so do not apply strong impact, etc., to it. Incorrect wiring will cause trouble. Always confirm the connector name and pin No., etc., before wiring.
III - 65
(4) C-axis control parts (Optionally supplied parts)

Encoder OSE90K+1024 BKO-NC7337H01

4-M4 depth 6
Caution plate
Connector
Connector key way
Main unit side : MS3102A20-29P Controller cable side : MS3102A20-29S (The connector on the controller cable side must be prepared by the user.)
5
Note 1. The max. encoder speed must be 6000r/min or less. Note 2. The dimensional tolerance that is not specified is 0.5mm.
Signal
1ch 2ch 3ch 4ch Generated signals 1024 C/T 1 C/T 90000 C/T 1 C/T Remarks A B-phase, A B -phase Z-phase Z -phase C D-phase, C D -phase Y-phase Y B-phase
Connector pin assignment

Pin A B C D E F G H J Function 1ch A-phase 2ch Z-phase 1ch B-phase Case grounding 3ch C-phase 3ch D-phase +5V DC 0V
+5% 10%
Pin K L M N P R S T
Function 0V 3ch C -phase 3ch D -phase 1ch A -phase 2ch Z -phase 1ch B -phase 4ch Y-phase 4ch Y -phase
Grounding plate and cable clamp fittings Refer to "5.4 Single parts (optionally supplied parts)".
III - 66
4.3.2
When using built-in encoder (MBE90K)
Refer to the MBE90K (built-in C-axis encoder) Specifications and Instruction Manual [BNP-A2993-41].
4.3.3
When using built-in encoder (MHE90K)
Refer to the MHE90K (built-in C-axis encoder) Specifications and Instruction Manual [BNP-A2993-44].
III - 67
4.4
4.4.1
Single parts (optionally supplied parts)

Power step-down transformer
When available power supply is at 400V, use this optional step-down transformer. (1) 12-23kVA (ITEM1 to 3)
HV & LV Terminal Bolt Size : M8
ITEM 1 2 3
Capacity Dimensions (kVA) 12 17 23 A 230 175 215
Mass (kg) 90 115 130
Remarks 7.5K 11K 15K
Name Plate
Ventilation Window (With Right & Left, Backside) 4-M5 Thread Lifting Eye Bolt
DIA Hole : 62
Earthing Terminal Bolt Size : M6 Name Plate Terminal Board Front Cover (Removable)
Setting Base (DIA Holes "M12K")
III - 68
(2) 30kVA to 75kVA (ITEM4 to 8)
HV Terminal Bolt Size : G
LV Terminal Bolt Size : G
ITEM 4 5 6 7 8
Capacity (kVA) 30 37 44 60 75
A 535 535 535 625 625
B 395 395 425 425 425
Dimensions C D E 625 460 250 665 460 250 665 460 265 815 540 255 840 540 270
F 445 485 485 625 650
G M12 M12 M12 M16 M16
Mass (kg) 165 185 205 280 320
Remarks 18.5K 22K, 26K 30K 37K 45K
Name Plate 4-M5 Thread Terminal Window Lifting Eye Bolt Earthing Terminal (Bolt Size : M16) Cover For Connecting Terminal (Removable)
Terminal Board
Setting Base (DIA Hole "M12")
III - 69
4.4.2
Noise filter
(1) Selection If radio noise must be reduced, select a noise filter from the following table according to the power supply unit model:
MDS-C1-CV37 55 75 110 150, 185 220, 260, 300 Noise filter name (Tohoku Kinzoku) LF-330 LF-340 LF-350 LF-360 LF-380K Two LF-380K units in parallel
(2) Noise filter installation position Insert the noise filter in the unit input.
Power distribution box CB Power supply unit Power supply Noise filter (MDS-C1-CV) Connect to the transformer input in power supply units that use the transformer.
(3) Specifications
Name Rated voltage AC/DC (V) Rated current AC/DC (A) Tested voltage AC 1 min. (V) Between case terminals Insulation resistance (M) 500VDC Leakage current (mA) 250V 60Hz Working temperature range (C)
330 340 350 360 380K
200V 200V 200V 200V 200V
30A 40A 50A 60A 80A
1500 1500 1500 1500 2000
> 300 > 300 > 300 > 300 > 300
<1 <1 <1 <1 <5
20 to +55 20 to +45 20 to +45 20 to +45 25 to +55
III - 70
(4) Shape and dimensions LF-300 Series
IN rating nameplate
Part name
LF-330 LF-340 LF-350 LF-360
180 180 180 200
170 160 160 180
60 50 50 60
29 30 30 30
120 200 200 300
135 220 220 320
150 240 240 340
35 40 40 50
65 80 80 100 (mm)
LF-K Series
Name
Terminal plate
LF-380K
TE-K22 M6
670
400
560
380
500
170
96.5
6.5
III - 71
4.5
Other optional specifications
Refer to the following optional specifications for each model shown below for optional specifications not explained in this manual.
Title of optional specifications (1) MDS-B/C1-SP Series coil changeover function optional specifications Specifications No. BNP-A2993-23
III - 72
4.6
Theoretical acceleration and deceleration times
In the calculation described below, load torque is assumed to be zero. Therefore, acceleration and deceleration times determined here somewhat differ from actual acceleration and deceleration times. (1) Definition
P0
N (r/min)
(Note)
1) "P0" is (Rated power 1.2). Example : For spindle of 2.2/3.7kW, P0 = 3700 1.2 = 4440 (W) 2) GD2 = (Motor GD2) + (Motor shaft conversion load GD2) (kgm2)
(2) Acceleration/deceleration time "t" (a) Constant torque zone 1.03 GD2 N12 t1 = 375 P0 Example: (s) GD L = 0.123kgm2 For motor SJ-N3.7A
2 2
(b) Constant output (power) zone 1.03 GD2 (N22 N12) t2 = 2 375 P0 (c) Reduced output zone 1.03 GD2 (N33 N23) t3 = 3 375 P0 N2 Therefore, acc./dec. time t (0 N3) is, t = t1 + t2 + t3 (s)
From specification 2, GD M = 0.021kgm2 thus, GD2 = 0.021 + 0.123 = 0.144 kgm2 (s) t1 = t2 = t3 =
1.03 0.144 15002 375 3700 1.2
2
= 0.200 (s)
2
1.03 0.144 (6000 1500 ) = 1.503 (s) 2 375 3700 1.2 1.03 0.144 (8000 6000 ) = 1.465 (s) 3 375 3700 1.2 6000
3 3
Acc./dec. time for 0 8000r/min t = 0.200 + 1.503 + 1.465 = 3.168 (s)
Unit conversion : Speed
2 rad/s 60 Output (power) : 1kW = 1/1.3596HP

: 1r/min =
Formula : P = T0 = (2
N )T 60
P T0 N T : : : : : Output [W] Angular velocity [rad/s] Torque [Nm] Speed [r/min] Torque [Nm] III - 73
IV. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section
1. Starting up the System

1.1 Startup procedures WARNING
1. Provide Class 3 grounding or higher for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor. 2. Do not operate the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks. 3. Do not turn the power ON with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and could result in electric shocks. 4. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Correctly connect the spindle amplifier and spindle motor power phases (U, V, W). Failure to do so could result in abnormal operation of the spindle motor. 2. Apply only the designated voltage on each terminal. Failure to observe this could result in ruptures or faults. 3. Turn the spindle amplifier power OFF if the spindle amplifier fails. Fires could start if a large current continues to flow. 4. Cut off the power with the error signal. The regenerative resistor could abnormally overheat and ignite due to a fault in the regenerative transistor, etc. 5. Check each parameter before starting operation. Unpredictable movements could result depending on the machine. 6. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor unit and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns. The procedures for starting up the entire system are explained in this section. Refer to each Unit Section for details on adjusting the individual units. (1) Connect the units as shown in the connection drawing. (Refer to I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section, 4. Connection of Each Unit.) Observe the precautions given on pages i to v and Chapters I to III when installing each unit and motor. (2) Set each unit's rotary switch. (3) Check the wiring and input voltage, etc. Turn the power ON with READY OFF or in the emergency stop state, and confirm that each unit's LED display is correct. (Refer to the next page.) (4) Check the personal computer or spindle drive unit LED to confirm that the parameters are set as specified. (Refer to III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section, 3. Status Display and Parameter Settings, etc., for details on the parameter meanings and setting methods.) (5) Release the emergency stop, turn READY ON, and make adjustments according to each Unit Section. * Setting the rotary switch 1) (a) Power supply unit Setting 0: Contactor installed 1: Contactor not installed (b) Resistance regeneration converter unit Always set "0". 2) Spindle drive unit Usually set to "0" when starting up.
IV - 1
1.2 Status display with 7-segment LED

The status can be displayed on the 7-segment LED on the power supply and spindle drive unit when the power is turned ON.
MDS-A/B-CVpower supply unit MDS-A-CR Resistance regeneration type power supply
MDS-A/B-SPA spindle drive unit 3 200/230VAC ON
24VDC ON (3 200/230VAC is ON only when using resistance regeneration converter)
Initializing
Initializing
Waiting for READY ON
Alarm No. display at alarm occurrence

Alarm display during alarm (When the parameter error AL37 occurs, the alarm No. and parameter No. are displayed.)
Waiting for READY Emergency ON stop READY ON Waiting for servo ON Servo ON
READY ON
Normal operation Normal operation Reset or emergency stop Reset
IV - 2
2. Adding and Replacing Units and Parts

WARNING
Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit has turned OFF before adding or replacing units and parts. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults.
CAUTION
1. Correctly transport the product according to its mass. Failure to observe this could result in injury. 2. Do not stack the product above the indicated limit. 3. Install the product on non-combustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible materials could result in fires. 4. When installing, always observe this manual and install on a place which can withstand the mass. 5. Do not get on the product, or place heavy objects on it. Failure to observe this could result in injury. 6. Use the product within the designated environment conditions. 7. Do not allow conductive matters such as screws or metal pieces, or combustible matters such as oil enter the spindle amplifier or spindle motor. 8. Do not block the spindle amplifier or spindle motors intake/outtake ports. Failure to observe this could result in faults. 9. The spindle amplifier and spindle motor are precision devices. Do not drop them or apply strong impacts. 10. Do not install or operate a spindle amplifier or spindle motor that is damaged or missing parts. 11. Consult with the Service Center or Service Station when storing the spindle amplifier for a long time.
2.1 Replacing the unit CAUTION

1. Do not hold the front cover when transporting the spindle amplifier. The amplifier could drop and cause injury. 2. Always observe the installation direction. Failure to do so could result in faults. 3. Provide the specified distance between the spindle amplifier and inner surface of the control panel and between other devices. Failure to do so could result in faults. 4. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns. Replace the units with the following procedures. 1) Replacing the power supply unit. (a) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4 and 9. (b) Disconnect each wire connected to L1, L2, L3, , L+, L, L11, L21 and MC1 on the terminal block. (c) Remove the two screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from the control panel. (d) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse. (e) Check the rotary switch settings.
IV - 3
2)
Replacing the resistance regeneration converter (a) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4 and 22. (b) Disconnect each wire connected to L1, L2, L3, , L+, L-, C, MC1 and MC2 on the terminal block. (c) Remove the two (four) screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from the control panel. (d) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse. (e) Check the rotary switch settings. Replacing the spindle drive unit (a) Save the parameters for the fault drive unit with a personal computer, or write the parameters for the faulty amplifier in the Appendix 1 Parameter Setting list. (b) Disconnect the connectors connected to CN4, 5, 6, 8A, 9A, 10, 11 and 12. (c) Disconnect the wires connected to U, V, W, , L+, L, L11 and L21 on the terminal block. (d) Remove the two (four) screws fixing the unit onto the control panel, and remove the unit from the control panel. (e) Install the new unit following the reversal procedures in reverse. (f) Set the parameters, and adjust the speed, speedometer and load meter. When using magnetic sensor orientation, confirm and adjust the orientation stop position. Install the same type of unit as the faulty unit. For the spindle drive unit, make sure that all parts, including the options, are the same type.
3)
Note)
IV - 4
[Appearance drawing] 1) Power supply unit B-CV-37 to 185 C1-CV-37 to 185 B-CV-220 to 300 C1-CV-220 to 370 2) Spindle drive unit B-SPT-04 to 185 C1-SPT-04 to 185 B-SPT-220 to 300 C1-SPT-220 to 370
CHARGE lamp
CHARGE lamp
CHARGE lamp
IV - 5
2.2 Unit fan

The fan life is approximately five years under normal conditions (the life is affected by the usage state and environment). Use the following procedure to replace the fan. (1) MDS-B Series [Replacement method] 1. 2. 3. Turn the 200/230VAC input power's NF OFF, wait for the power supply unit's CHARGE lamp to go out, and then remove the unit. Remove the two installation screws on the bottom of the cooling fins. Disconnect the connectors from the back of the unit, and replace the fan.
Remove these two screws Disconnect the connector from the units
(2) MDS-C1 Series [Replacement method] 1. 2. 3. 4. Turn the 200/230VAC input power's NF OFF, wait for the power supply unit's CHARGE lamp to go out, and then remove the unit. Remove the fan guard from the back of the unit, and remove the two fan installation screws. Remove the rubber bushing from the fan drive wire, and pull out the connected connector. Disconnect the connected connector, and replace the fan.
Remove these two screws Remove the rubber bushing Pull out the connected connector, and disconnect the connector
IV - 6
3. Daily Maintenance
WARNING
1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned OFF before starting maintenance or inspections. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults. 2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or Service Station for repairs and part replacement.
3.1 Maintenance tools Notice Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement) on the spindle amplifier.
(1) Measuring instruments The following measuring instruments are required to confirm that the power is correctly supplied to the spindle amplifier, and that the spindle amplifier is correctly wired, etc. Instrument Tester Oscilloscope AC voltmeter Condition Check that the wires to the spindle amplifier are correctly wired before turning the power ON. Use for general-purpose measurements and troubleshooting Measure the AC power Measure the AC power voltage supplied to the voltage. spindle amplifier. Tolerable difference is 2% or less. Maximum scale 10V, 30V, Use to measure the DC power voltage and 450V voltage across PN. Tolerable difference is 2% or less.
DC voltmeter
Note) (2) Tools
A digital voltmeter may be used instead of the AC voltmeter, DC voltmeter and tester.
Screwdrivers (Phillips: large, medium, small, flat-tip: small)
3.2 Periodic inspections

The unit is a stationary type, but the unit's built-in fan and additional cooling fan must be inspected periodically. The spindle motor does not required maintenance. However, periodically check that there is no abnormal noise, abnormal vibration or clogging at the motor cooling fan, etc.
IV - 7
Recommended periodic inspection items Item Cooling fan (unit built-in fan), and Additional cooling fan (outside unit) Inspection frequency Monthly Inspection details Remedies
1. Does the fan rotate lightly by hand? Clean or replace the 2. Does the fan rotate correctly when fan the power is turned ON? 3. Is the fan contaminated with dirt or oil? 4. Is there any abnormal noise from the bearings? Tighten the screws 2. Are any of the screws contaminated Clean with dirt or oil?
Terminal block screws
Periodically 1. Are any of the screws loose?
Cable and connector
Periodically 1. Are any cables damaged or nicked, etc.? 2. Are any connectors loose?
Replace the cable Tighten the connectors
Motor
Noise/ vibration Temperature Insulation
Monthly Monthly
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration? Is the motor's bearings or frame hot when touched?
Twice/year Is the insulation resistance 1M or more when measured with a 500V megger tester? (Disconnect any wires connected to the spindle drive unit before measuring.) Monthly Clean or replace the 1. Does the fan rotate correctly when fan, or clean the finger the power is turned ON? 2. Is the fan contaminated with dirt or guard oil? 3. Is the finger guard clogged with dirt or oil? 4. Is there any abnormal noise from the bearings?
Cooling fan
IV - 8
4. Maintenance Parts
4. Maintenance Parts
No. 1 Part Fan (built into unit) Type Applicable unit Manufacturer Replace Quantity -ment interval Remarks
AC reactor
3 4
Contactor NFB
VFA-4018-BH20 B-CV-37 BKO-NC6855H01 55 75 B-SPT-22 37 VFA-8018-BH20 B-SPT-55 BKO-NC6855H02 75 110 (new type) S80D22-TW B-CV-110 BKO-NC6855H11 B-SPT-110 (old type) S92B22-TW B-CV-150 BKO-NC6855H12 185 B-SPT-150 185 S12D22-TW B-CV-220 BKO-NC6855H13 260 300 B-SPT-220 260 300 MMF-09C24TSC1-CV-150 RN4 185 BKO-NC533H14 C1-CV-220 260 300 370 C1-SP/H-150 185 220 260S 300S MMF-06F24ESC1-CV-110 RN5 C1-SP/H-55 BKO-NC5332H12 75 110 150S C1-SP/H-260 300 MMF-04C24DSC1-SP/H-22 ROE 37 BKO-NC5332H11 B-AL-7.5K -11K -18.5K -30K -37K Depends on power supply unit Depends on power supply unit
Style Electronics
The fan life will vary according to the usage environment and conditions. 5 years 1 2 * The additional cooling fan is prepared by the manufacturer.
2 Melco Technorex 1 2 4 2 Mitsubishi Electric

Depends on system configuration
At fault
Mitsubishi Electric Mitsubishi Electric
Depends on system configuration Depends on system configuration
At fault At fault
IV - 9
5. Selection of Leakage Breaker
5. Selection of Leakage Breaker

As a PWM-controlled higher harmonic chopper current flows into the spindle motor, the leakage current is higher than a motor operated with commercial power. When installing a leakage breaker as indicated below, make sure to ground both the drive unit and motor.
MDS spindle system
200/230VAC Inverter device 1 Motor
Inverter device 2
Machine power distribution box
The commercial frequency element of the leakage current in the MDS-B Series spindle system is approx. 6mA per spindle motor. However, when selecting the leakage breaker, calculate this as max. 15mA per spindle motor in consideration of the motor power cable length, distance from grounding and motor size, etc. If other inverter devices are connected on the same power line, consider the leakage current for these devices when selecting the leakage breaker, and install these at the section shown with A above. Note that a leakage breaker (inverter compatible) that removes the higher harmonic elements with a filter and detects only the leakage current in the commercial frequency range (approx. 50 to 60Hz) must be selected. Incorrect operations may take place if a breaker that is too sensitive to the higher harmonic elements is used. (Note) When there is one spindle, and the total current leakage of devices on the same power line is 7mA 15mA + 7mA = 22mA Select the leakage breaker so that this calculated value is within the rated non-operating sensitivity current. When using a leakage tester to check faults such as malfunctioning of the leakage breaker, select a tester that is not easily affected by the higher harmonics, and set the measurement range to 50 to 60Hz. Example) SOUKOU Electric LC-30F (Note) Always ground the machine with Class 3 or higher grounding for safety purposes. IV - 10
6. Noise Filter
6. Noise Filter
If noise is a problem, especially with AM radio broadcasts, due to the electromagnetic wave noise generated from the motor and spindle drive unit, install radio noise filter to reduce the noise. Use this filter as needed. Refer to III. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section, "4.4.2 Noise filter" for details on the selection method, installation position and outline, etc.
IV - 11
V. Maintenance MDS-B-CVE/MDS-C1-CV Power Supply Section
1. Troubleshooting
1. Troubleshooting
1.1 Status display WARNING
1. Provide Class 3 grounding or higher for the spindle amplifier and spindle motor. 2. Do not touch the switches with wet hands. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks. 3. Do not operate the unit with the front cover removed. The high voltage terminals and charged sections will be exposed, and can cause electric shocks. 4. Do not open the front cover while the power is ON or during operation. Failure to observe this could lead to electric shocks.
CAUTION
1. Check and adjust each program and parameter before starting operation. Failure to do so could lead to unforeseen operation of the machine. 2. The spindle amplifier cooling fins, regenerative resistor and spindle motor, etc., will be hot during operation and for a short time after operation is stopped. Touching these sections could result in burns. The power supply unit's status is displayed on the power supply unit's 7-segment LED. When an alarm occurs, the alarm No. is displayed on the 7-segment LED of the spindle drive unit connected with the communication cable (CN4). (1) 7-segment display The power supply unit's status is displayed with the 7-segment LED on the top of the power supply unit. The alarm code flickers when an alarm or warning occurs. The display is not an alarm if it is not flickering. 7-segment display b C d * : Flicker Details Ready OFF Until the emergency stop is canceled after 200VAC (24VDC) is turned ON. Servo OFF Changes to display d approx. one second after emergency stop is canceled. Servo ON Indicates that the emergency stop is canceled and operation is possible.
Indicates that an alarm or warning is occurring.
(Note) Alarm display code (This display code differs from the alarm No.)
V-1
1. Troubleshooting
[Operation] a: The base interception is carried out for the spindle drive unit, the external contactor turns OFF, and the spindle motor coasts to a stop. b: Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues. [Resetting methods] AR : Reset by turning the power supply unit power OFF and ON. PR : Reset by turning the NC power OFF and ON. NR : Reset with the NC reset key.
List of power supply alarms and warnings

Alarm No. 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 75 76 77 E8 E9 EA EB LED display 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b c E F G H i J L M N O P Q R Model displaying alarms B-CV C1-CV Power module overcurrent Always after power ON Frequency error Not used Rush relay error Not used Open phase Watch dog Ground fault Contactor melting Rush relay melting Main circuit error Memory error A/D converter error/ Power supply error Not used Instantaneous stop/ External emergency stop Not used Over-regeneration Overvoltage External emergency stop setting error Power module overheat Auxiliary regeneration frequency over Instantaneous warning External emergency stop input Always after power ON Always after power ON At power ON Always after power ON Always after power ON During Ready ON At power ON a a a a b b b b PR (Note 1) NR (Note 2) AR AR During Ready ON a NR At Ready OFF Ready ON Always after power ON At Ready OFF Ready ON During Ready OFF During Ready OFF At Ready OFF Ready ON Immediately after power ON Immediately after power ON/ always a a a a a a a a PR AR PR PR PR PR AR AR At Ready OFF Ready ON a PR Always after power ON Auxiliary regeneration error Always after power ON a a a PR PR PR Meaning Detection timing Ope- Resetting ration method
Over-regeneration warning Always after power ON
(Note 1) Alarm "73" occurs to prevent operation from being resumed immediately after an over-regeneration state. Thus, it cannot be reset unless 15 minutes or more have passed from the start of the control current (L11, L21) after the alarm occurs. Immediately after the alarm occurs, it cannot be reset even if the NC power or control power is turned OFF and ON. If the power is turned ON again after the alarm occurrence, wait at least 15 minutes in the power ON state, and then turn it ON again. (Note 2) The voltage across L+ and L- is higher than the power voltage immediately after alarm "75" occurs. If the alarm is reset in this state, other alarms could occur. Wait at least 5 minutes after alarm "75" occurs before resetting it. V-2
1. Troubleshooting
1.2 Troubleshooting according to power supply alarm CAUTION

To reset the alarm, remove the cause, confirm that the run signal is not input and ensure the surrounding safety. Then, reset the alarm and resume operation. If an alarm occurs in the spindle amplifier, the base interception will be carried out and the motor will coast to a stop. Set an external sequence that turns the power OFF. To reset the alarm, remove the cause, and then turn the power OFF and ON or turn the alarm reset signal ON and OFF. (1) Alarm No. 61 Power module overcurrent [Meaning] An overcurrent was detected in the power supply's power module. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Always after power ON

Investigation details Check the state of the operation when the alarm occurs, and check the repeatability. Investigation results The alarm occurs each time immediately after 200VAC is turned ON and the servo is turned ON. The alarm occurs frequently during servo ON. The alarm occurs when the motor is decelerating. The alarm occurs after continuous operation for a long time. The unit is hot. The total of all motor loads exceeds the power supply rated capacity. The total does not exceed the capacity. Remedies Replace the unit.
Investigate item 3, and take measures.
Investigate item 2, and take measures.
Check the load state of all motors, and the starting/stopping frequency. Investigate whether the power is correct. (1) Is the specified power capacity ensured? (2) Using a tester, check whether the voltage is 170V or more even during motor acceleration/deceleration. (3) Monitor the power voltage with an oscilloscope (also during acceleration/deceleration).
Lower the motor load and operation frequency. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
The power capacity is insufficient. The voltage drops below 170V. The voltage is 170V or more. 1. Voltage waveform distortion
Increase the power capacity. Increase the power capacity. Investigate item (3), and take measures. Eliminate the wave distortion. 1. Increase the power capacity, or increase the power cable size. 2. Improve the other semiconductor device in which waveform distortion is occurring. (Additionally install an AC reactor, etc.)
2. When there is a local drop
3. Other waveform or frequency abnormality Using a tester, measure the voltage The voltage difference across each wire is across the R-S, S-T and T-R wires. 10V or more. Nothing applies. Investigate the installation environment. The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices device operates. in the area? No problem.
Improve the power phase balance. Investigate item 4, and take measures. Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left. Replace the unit.
V-3
1. Troubleshooting
(2) Alarm No. 62 Frequency error [Meaning] The input power frequency exceeded the specified range. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV

Investigation details 1 Check the state of the operation when the alarm occurs, and check the repeatability. Investigation results The alarm occurs each time immediately after the power is turned ON. The alarm occurs occasionally regardless of the operation state. The alarm occurs only while the motor is accelerating/decelerating. 2 Measure the power voltage during normal operation. Investigate item 3. Remedies Investigate item 2.
The frequency is deviated from 50Hz3% Review the power facilities. or 60Hz3%. The frequency deviates from 50Hz3% or 60Hz3% in some cases due to a fluctuation in frequency. The voltage waveform dips at some sections. The frequency is 50Hz3% or 60Hz3%. No problem. Take measures for the problem causing power unit or device. (Add an AC reactor, etc.) Replace the unit. Investigate item 4. Review the power facilities.
Measure the power voltage during motor acceleration/deceleration.
The frequency greatly fluctuates during acceleration/deceleration.
The voltage waveform during deceleration Take measures for the problem causing dips in some section. power unit or device. (Add an AC reactor, etc.) No problem. 4 Investigate the installation environment. The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates. No problem. Investigate item 4. Correctly ground. Provide noise measures for the devices causing the problem on the left. Replace the unit.
(3) Alarm No. 63 Auxiliary regeneration error [Meaning] The auxiliary regenerative resistor in the power supply stays ON. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV

Investigation details 1 Check whether the regenerative resistance unit on the back of the unit is dirty. Investigation results Cutting oil or oil mist is adhered on the regenerative resistance unit. Remedies Take measures so that cutting oil and dust do not contact the fins on the back of the unit. Then, investigate item 2, and take measures. Replace the unit. Replace the unit. Clean the resistor or fins, and take measures so that oil and dust do not come in contact. Monitor the state. If the alarm recurs, replace the unit.
The resistor is not dirty. 2 Using a tester, confirm the conductivity There is continuity. between the terminal unit (L+, L, L1, The resistance value is . L2, L3) and resistor surface.
V-4
1. Troubleshooting
(4) Alarm No. 65 Rush relay error [Meaning] The relay for the rush resistance short-circuit in the power supply does not turn ON. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] At Ready OFF Ready ON

Investigation details 1 Investigate the repeatability. Investigation results The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON. The alarm occurs occasionally. 2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area? The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates. No problem. Remedies Replace the unit. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left. Replace the unit.
(5) Alarm No. 67 Phase failure [Meaning] One-phase of the 3 200VAC input is not connected
Operation unit B-CV C1-CV

Investigation details 1 Using a tester, check the voltage of each input phase. Investigation results There are phases with no voltage. All phases are normal. Remedies Correctly supply the power. Investigate items 3 and 4 for alarm 71 (instantaneous power failure).
(6) Alarm No. 68 Watch dog [Meaning] The power supply software process did not end within the specified time.

Investigation details 1 Investigate the repeatability. Investigation results The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON. The alarm occurs occasionally. 2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area? The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates. No problem. Remedies Replace the unit. Investigate item 2. Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left. Replace the unit.
V-5
1. Troubleshooting
(7) Alarm No. 69 Ground fault [Meaning] Motor ground fault

Investigation details 1 Investigation results Remedies Motor fault or cable ground fault. Replace the motor or cable. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Take measures so that oil does not come in contact. Clean the motor's cannon connector and the inside of the terminal box. Monitor the state. If the alarm recurs, investigate item 3 and take measures. Investigate item 3, and take measures. Replace the motor or cable. Replace the unit.
Using a megger tester, measure the 100k or less. insulation between the UVW terminals and grounding of all motors. 100k or more. Does oil come in contact with motor or Oil has come in contact. cable?
Oil has not come in contact. 3 Measure the insulation again. 1M or less. More than 1M
(8) Alarm No. 6A External contactor melting [Meaning] The external contactor turned ON even when Ready was OFF. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During Ready OFF

Investigation details 1 Is a contactor installed externally? Investigation results A contactor is not installed externally. A contactor is installed externally. 2 Is the contactor melted? Disconnect the contactor excitation wire, and start up. Does an error (power module error, etc.) occur on the driver side before alarm 6A? Is the contactor exciting wire correctly passed through the MC1-L11 terminals? Alarm 6A occurs. Alarm 6A does not occur. An error is occurring. Remedies Set the power supply rotary switch (SW1) to 1. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Investigate item 3, and take measures. Investigate item 4, and take measures. Remove the cause of the alarm on the driver side, and then replace the contactor. Replace the contactor. Wire correctly as shown below.
An error is not occurring. 4 The connection is incorrect.
Power supply EMG switch, etc.

The connection is correct. Replace the unit.
V-6
1. Troubleshooting
(9) Alarm No. 6B Rush relay melted [Meaning] The relay for the rush resistance short-circuit in the power supply stays ON. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During Ready OFF

Investigation details 1 Investigate the repeatability. Investigation results The alarm occurs each time the power is turned ON. The alarm occurs sometimes. 2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area? Does an error (power module error, etc.) occur on the driver side before alarm 6B? The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates. No problem. An error is occurring. Remedies Investigate item 3, and take measures. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left. Replace the unit. Remove the cause of the alarm on the driver side, and then replace the power supply unit. Replace the unit.
An error is not occurring.
(10) Alarm No. 6C Main circuit error [Meaning] The charging operation to the main circuit is not correct. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV

Investigation details 1 Check the CHARGE lamp ON state when the alarm occurs. Investigation results The CHARGE lamp remains ON for some time. Remedies Replace the unit.
The lamp turns ON instantly, but when the Investigate item 2, and take measures. alarm occurs and the contactor turns OFF, the lamp turns OFF immediately. The lamp never turns ON. 2 Disconnect the L+ and L- terminal block wiring, and check the following resistance value with a tester.
Spindle drive Spindle drive Power unit (2) unit (1) supply unit
Investigate item 2, take measures, and then replace the unit. Replace the unit.
(1) The power supply unit side is abnormal.
(2) The spindle drive unit side is abnormal. Review the PN wiring, and investigate the spindle drive unit. (1) and (2) are both normal.
Tester measurement point Correct resistance value Approx. 100 Infinite Approx. 100 Infinite
Replace the unit.
(2)
L+ L
Faulty
(1)
Power supply side
+ L+ LL+ L-
LL+ LL+ Short-circuit or infinite Short-circuit or several 100 Short-circuit or infinite Short-circuit or several 100
Disconnect only power supply's L+ and L- wires. Using a tester, measure the resistance value at (1) and (2).
Spindle drive side
V-7
1. Troubleshooting
(12) Alarm No. 6E Memory error [Meaning] Abnormality in power supply memory circuit
[Detection] Immediately after power ON

Investigation details 1 Investigate the repeatability. Investigation results The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON. The alarm occurs occasionally. 2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area? The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates. No problem. Remedies Replace the unit. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left. Replace the unit.
(13) Alarm No. 6F A/D converter error/Power supply error [Meaning] Abnormality in power supply's A/D converter, or spindle drive unit detected an abnormality in the power supply. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Immediately after power ON (A/D converter abnormality)/always (power supply abnormality)
Investigation details 1 Check the power supply's 7-segment LED display. Investigation results "F" is flickering. Remedies A/D converter abnormality. Use the same remedy as the alarm 6E memory error. Refer to the section for each alarm. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Refer to the alarm 68 watch dog alarm item. Investigate item 3, and take measures. Use the same remedy as the alarm 68 watch dog alarm. Replace the unit.
Another alarm code is flickering. 0 stays displayed F stays displayed 8 stays displayed b, c and d stay displayed Something else is displayed. 2 Check the rotary switch settings. For MDS-A-CV: 0 or 1 For MDS-B-CV: 0, 1, 4, 5 For MDS-A-CR: 0 A value other than the above is set. 3 Check the wiring of the driver communication cable. The wiring is incorrect. The cable is not shielded. The wiring is OK. 4 Try replacing the communication cable OK after replacement. connected with the driver. NG even after replacement.
Correctly set the rotary switch. Replace the cable. Investigate item 4, and take measures. Cable fault Replace the unit.
V-8
1. Troubleshooting
(14)
Alarm No. 71 Instantaneous power failure/ external emergency stop [Meaning] The external contactor turned OFF. An instantaneous power failure occurred for 25ms or longer. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During Ready ON

Investigation details 1 Investigation results Remedies The power supply operates normally. Check the machine sequence. When directly turning OFF the contactor with the emergency stop button and NC emergency stop is applied simultaneously with the contactor OFF, emergency stop will occur instead of an alarm. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Investigate item 3, and take measures. Investigate item 1 again. If there is no abnormality, investigate item 3. Investigate item 4, and take measures. Correct the state explained on the left. Investigate item 4, and take measures. Review the power facility. Replace the unit.
Investigate the sequence to check The contactor is OFF. whether the contactor has been turned OFF with an emergency stop button, etc.
The contactor is not OFF. 2 Investigate the state of occurrence. The alarm occurs each time READY is turned ON. The alarm occurs at a certain operation.
The alarm occurs sometimes during operation. (With no regularity) 3 4 Is the RST wiring correct? Is the contactor's wiring sequence correct? Monitor the power waveform with an oscilloscope. The wiring or sequence is abnormal. There is no problem. An instantaneous power failure or voltage drop occurs frequently. There is no problem.
(15) Alarm No. 73 Over-regeneration [Meaning] The regenerative resistor's load exceeded the tolerable value. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV

Investigation details 1 Investigate the state of alarm occurrence. Investigation results The alarm occurs when the motor is not rotating after power ON. The alarm does not occur when the acceleration/deceleration frequency is reduced. Other than the above. Remedies Check for power fluctuation, the ground connection and for the effect of noise. If there is no abnormality, replace the unit. Investigate items 2 and following. If there is no problem, reduce the acceleration/deceleration frequency. MDS-A-CR: Investigate item 2 and take measures. MDS-B-CV: Investigate item 3 and take measures. Correctly set and then check again. Investigate item 3, and take measures.
2 Check that external regenerative CR resistor type is set correctly with the only parameter (PTYP) for the drive unit connected to the power supply unit. Check that the rotary switch is set to "0". * The switch may be set to "2" for special specifications. 3 Confirm that the alarm "75" investigate items 3 and following and the regenerative resistance value, etc., are correct.
The type is incorrect. (Refer to the alarm "6D" parameter setting.) The setting is correct.
V-9
1. Troubleshooting
(17) Alarm No. 75 Overvoltage [Meaning] The voltage across PN exceeded 410V. Operation unit B-CV
Remedies Investigate item 4, and take measures. Investigate item 3, and take measures. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Investigate item 3, and take measures. Investigate item 3, and take measures. Reduce the frequency of simultaneous deceleration. Investigate item 4, and take measures. Increase the power capacity. Increase the power capacity. Carry out item (3). Eliminate the wave distortion. 1. Increase the power capacity, or increase the power cable size. 2. Improve the other semiconductor device in which waveform distortion is occurring. (Additionally install an AC reactor, etc.)
[Detection] Always after power ON.

Investigation details 1 Check the state of alarm occurrence. Investigation results
C1-CV
The alarm occurs each time the motor decelerates. The alarm occurs each time in a specific deceleration mode. The alarm occurs occasionally. If possible, monitor the 7-segment E0 is output just before the overvoltage. display. (Over-regeneration warning) Others. Monitor the operation of each axis The regeneration load increases when when the alarm occurs. (When multiple several axes are decelerated spindle drive units are connected to simultaneously. one converter.) Other than the above. Check whether the power is correct. (1) Is the specified power capacity The power capacity is insufficient. secured? (2) Using a tester, check that the The voltage drops below 170V. voltage is 170V or more even The voltage is 170V or more. during motor acceleration/deceleration. (3) Monitor the power voltage with an 1. Voltage waveform distortion oscilloscope (also during acceleration/deceleration).
2. When there is a local drop
Using a tester, measure the voltage across the R-S, S-T and T-R wires. 5 Monitor the power waveform with an oscilloscope.
Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area?. If the alarm occurs when the motor is The correct value is not set. decelerating from speed of 8000rpm or The correct value is set. more, check the spindle parameters (SP067, SP068, SP069). When using special motor constants, check the (SP270 to SP273) setting values. If the alarm occurs the instant that the motor starts accelerating or decelerating, check the spindle parameter (SP046) value.
3. Other waveform or frequency abnormality The voltage difference across each wire is 10V or more. No abnormality is found in particular. An instantaneous power failure or voltage drop occurs frequently. There is no problem. The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates. No problem.
Improve the power phase balance. Investigate item 5, and take measures. Review the power facility. Investigate item 6, and take measures. Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left. Replace the unit. Correctly set. Change the setting values as explained for SP067 to SP069. Try increasing the SP270 to SP273 setting values by two to three fold. Try setting the SP276 and SP277 setting values to 0. Correctly set. Set a value between 1 and 8 in SP046. (Setting 1 is the most effective.)
The correct value is not set. The correct value is set.
V - 10
1. Troubleshooting
(18) Alarm No. 76 External emergency stop setting error [Meaning] The rotary switch setting and parameter (PTYP) setting do not match. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV

Investigation details 1 Investigation results Remedies 1. Set the rotary switch to 0 or 1. 2. Set the parameter (PTYP) between **00 and **39. 1. Set the rotary switch to 4 or 5. 2. Set the parameter (PTYP) between **40 and **79. Replace the unit.
Check the rotary switch setting and the When not using external emergency stop: parameter (PTYP) of the drive unit 1. The rotary switch is set to 4 or 5. connected to the power supply unit. 2. The parameter (PTYP) is set between **40 and **79. When using the external emergency stop: 1. The rotary switch is set to 0 or 1. 2. The parameter (PTYP) is set between **00 and **39. The setting combination is correct.
(19) Alarm No. 77 Power module overheat [Meaning] Overheating of the power supply's power module (IPM) was detected. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV

Investigation details 1 Check the heat radiating environment. (1) Rotation of the fan on the back of the unit (2) Contamination of heat radiating fins on back of unit. (3) Measure the unit's ambient temperature 2 Investigate the installation environment. Is the product correctly grounded? Are there any noise-generating devices in the area? Replace the fan. Take measures so that cutting oil and dust do not get on the The heat radiating fins are heavily Clean the fins. fins. contaminated with cutting oil and dust, etc. The fan is not rotating correctly. The temperature exceeds 55C Nothing applies. The grounding is incomplete. The alarm occurs easily when a specific device operates. No problem. Consider means to ventilate and cool the panel. Investigate item 2, and take measures. Correctly ground. Take measures for the device described on the left. Replace the unit. Investigation results Remedies
V - 11
1. Troubleshooting
1.3 Power supply warning

The power supply warning is displayed only on the power supply unit's 7-segment LED and is not displayed on the spindle drive unit's 7-segment LED. Operation can be continued after the warning, but it does indicate that there is a factor for an alarm. (1) Alarm history display E0 Auxiliary regeneration frequency over LED display [Meaning] This indicates that the instantaneous regeneration energy is high, and regeneration with just the power regeneration is not sufficient. The auxiliary regeneration has also functioned, and regeneration at the auxiliary regeneration capacity limit is occurring frequently. The auxiliary regeneration does not operate when this warning occurs, so an overvoltage alarm could occur. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During ready ON

Investigation details 1 Inspect items 3 and following for alarm 75 overvoltage. Investigation results Remedies
(2) Alarm history display E9 Instantaneous power failure warning LED display [Meaning] An instantaneous power failure occurred for 25ms or longer. An alarm did not occur because the main circuit voltage did not drop. This may cause an instantaneous power failure alarm, overvoltage alarm or power module error.
[Detection] During ready ON

Investigation details 1 Inspect items 3 and following for alarm 71 instantaneous power failure. Investigation results Remedies
(3) Alarm history display EA External emergency stop input LED display [Meaning] The external emergency stop signal was input, or 24V is not applied on the CN23 connector. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] Always after NC power ON

Investigation details 1 Investigation results Remedies
When not using the external External emergency stop is enabled in the Invalidate the settings. emergency stop: settings. Refer to investigation item 1 for alarm Check the rotary switch and parameter 76. (PTYP) settings Replace the unit. When using external emergency stop: 24V is applied on the CN23 connector. Check the CN23 connector voltage 24V is not applied on the CN23 connector. Investigate item 3. (1) Check whether the CN23 connector or cable is disconnected. (2) Check the external emergency stop switch's contact The connector or cable is disconnected or Replace the cable. sometimes comes loose. The contact is faulty or is faulty sometimes. Replace the switch.
2 3
V - 12
1. Troubleshooting
(4) Alarm history display EB Over-regeneration LED display [Meaning] 80% of the over-regeneration alarm level was reached. Operation unit B-CV C1-CV
[Detection] During Ready ON

Investigation details 1 Investigate the items for alarm 73 over-regeneration. Investigation results Remedies
V - 13
VI. Maintenance MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle Drive Unit Section
1. Adjustment Procedures
WARNING
1. When adjusting the drive unit with a personal computer, some parameters will be validated as soon as they are changed. Take special care when making adjustments while rotating the spindle, and take care not to approach body parts near the spindle. Failure to observe this could result in personal injury. 2. When monitoring the state of the spindle or spindle motor with a personal computer, if the spindle motors maximum speed is set to 33000r/min or more, the spindle motor speed displayed on the personal computer will be half of the actual speed. Failure to note this could result in spindle damage or personal injury.
CAUTION
1. Do not make extreme adjustments or changes to the parameters as the operation could become unstable. Note 1) Note 2) SP*** (***) in the following explanations refers to the spindle parameter number and abbreviation. Refer to III. Spindle Drive Unit Section, 4.4 for details on setting the parameters.
1.1 Starting up
(1) Confirm that the type of motor and spindle amplifier to be used are as ordered. (2) Confirm that the set spindle parameters (SP001 to SP384) match the setting list. Especially, confirm the following parameters well. (a) SP017 (TSP) Spindle motor maximum speed (b) SP034 (SFNC2) Spindle motor special settings (c) SP039/040 Spindle amplifier/motor type (d) SP257 to SP384 Spindle motor special constants (e) CNC side spindle related parameters (Refer to the Toshiba Machine CNC "TOSNUC 888.2" Instruction Manual.) (3) When using the built-in motor, adjust the speed detector's waveform according to the procedures given in the built-in motor specifications. To start open loop operation, set the SP038 (SNFC6) bit F to "1" and turn the drive unit power ON again. After completing the adjustments, return the setting to "0", and turn the power ON again.
1.2 Confirming the speed loop

1.2.2 Adjusting and confirming the motor (spindle) speed
The speed command is digitally input from the CNC, so there are no sections to be adjusted on the spindle amplifier side. Check the following items. Couple the spindle motor with the machine, and check the machine running-in state and the control state. (1) Do the command speed and actual speed match? (2) Is the rotation smooth? (3) Is there any abnormal noise? (4) Is there any abnormal odor? (5) Is the bearing temperature abnormal? Run the motor with an actual load, and confirm that there are no abnormalities. VI - 1
1.2.3 Adjusting the deceleration time

Connect a waveform recorded between the indicator's speedometer output (CN9A - pin 9) and analog common (CN9A - pin 1), and measure the acceleration/deceleration time. If the deceleration time is much longer than the acceleration time, refer to section III-45 and 46, and adjust the deceleration time. (Applicable parameters) Following two parameters SP087 (DIQM) SP088 (DIQN) Note) If the deceleration time is too small, an alarm such as AL32 (power module overcurrent) or AL75 (overvoltage) could occur. Set the deceleration time so that it is 95% or more of the acceleration time.
1.3 Adjusting the orientation

1.3.1 Operation
The following three types of orientation stop can be used. Select the method with SP097 (SPEC0). 1. PRE (a) Orients from the current rotation direction. 2. Forward run orientation (b) Always orients from the forward run direction. 3. Reverse run orientation (c) Always orients from the reverse run direction.
Speed (forward run)
Speed (forward run)
1.3.2 Operation sequence

1) When the orientation start command turns ON during motor rotation, the motor speed changes from the operation speed to the position loop changeover speed. The multi-point orientation stop position command is read in at the same time. When the position loop changeover speed is reached, the control changes from speed control to position control. (The position loop changeover speed is automatically determined from the position loop gain (Note 1).) When the control changes, the distance to the orientation stop point is calculated. The motor decelerates to a stop following a set deceleration pattern ( SP006 (CSP) ), and then enters the orientation stop state. When the in-position range ( SP004 (OINP) ) is entered, the orientation complete signal turns ON. The stop position zero point movement is carried out with SP007 (OPST). When the orientation start command is canceled, the motor returns to the rotation direction and speed command issued at that point. VI - 2
2)
3)
4) 5) 6)
Motor speed
Orientation start command 12-bit multi-point orientation command Gear selection command
(Note 1) Position loop gain parameters Motor built-in encoder orientation, magnetic sensor orientation: SP001 (PGM) Encoder orientation (1024p/rev) : SP002 (PGE)
1.3.3 Encoder orientation/motor built-in encoder orientation stop position

The stop position is as follows according to the encoder installation direction. Case 1 Normal orientation Installation direction
Encoder Motor Belt Arrow A
Arrow A
Case 2
View from arrow A

Forward run Reverse run
View from arrow A

Forward run Reverse run
(Note) Case 1 applies for the motor built-in encoder orientation.
VI - 3
1.3.4 Diagram of orientation parameter relation

Parameter names are enclosed in a box.
Position control block
Speed control block
From NC
Delay/advance
Or
Power amplifier
Position feedback
Speed feedback
Spindle motor
Encoder
Bit 5 or Bit 6
Bits 0 to 2 Magnetic sensor
Spindle
1.3.5 Preparation for motor built-in encoder orientation adjustment

[Related parameters]
Parameter No. SP001 SP004 SP005 SP006 SP007 SP025 SP026 SP027 SP028 SP029 SP030 SP031 SP032 SP097 SP098 SP099 SP100 SP105 SP106 SP107 SP108 SP109 SP119 SP120 SP121 SP122 Abbrev. PGM OINP OSP CSP OPST GRA1 GRA2 GRA3 GRA4 GRB1 GRB2 GRB3 GRB4 SPECO VGOP VGOI VGOD IQGO IDGO CSP2 CSP3 CSP4 MPGH MPGL MPCSH MPCSL Name Position loop gain for magnetic sensor, motor-built-in encoder orientation Orientation in-position width Orientation changeover speed limit value Deceleration rate at orientation Orientation position shift amount Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 2 Number of spindle side gear teeth 3 Number of spindle side gear teeth 4 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 Number of motor side gear teeth 2 Number of motor side gear teeth 3 Number of motor side gear teeth 4 Orientation specifications Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation Speed loop gain integral item for orientation Speed loop gain delay/advance item for orientation Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1 Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2 Orientation deceleration rate 2 Orientation deceleration rate 3 Orientation deceleration rate 4 Orientation position loop gain H coil compensation magnification Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification Deceleration rate H coil magnification for orientation Deceleration rate L coil magnification for orientation Default value 100 16 0 20 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0000 63 60 15 100 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
[Preparation] 1) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown above. VI - 4
1.3.6 Preparation for encoder orientation adjustment

Parameter No. SP002 SP004 SP005 SP006 SP007 SP025 SP026 SP027 SP028 SP029 SP030 SP031 SP032 SP096 SP097 SP098 SP099 SP100 SP105 SP106 SP107 SP108 SP109 SP119 SP120 SP121 SP122 Abbrev. PGE OINP OSP CSP OPST GRA1 GRA2 GRA3 GRA4 GRB1 GRB2 GRB3 GRB4 EGRA SPECO VGOP VGOI VGOD IQGO IDGO CSP2 CSP3 CSP4 MPGH MPGL MPCSH MPCSL Name Position loop gain for encoder orientation Orientation in-position width Orientation changeover speed limit value Deceleration rate at orientation Orientation position shift amount Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 2 Number of spindle side gear teeth 3 Number of spindle side gear teeth 4 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 Number of motor side gear teeth 2 Number of motor side gear teeth 3 Number of motor side gear teeth 4 Encoder gear ratio Orientation specifications Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation Speed loop gain integral item for orientation Speed loop gain delay/advance item for orientation Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1 Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2 Orientation deceleration rate 2 Orientation deceleration rate 3 Orientation deceleration rate 4 Orientation position loop gain H coil compensation magnification Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification Deceleration rate H coil magnification for orientation Deceleration rate L coil magnification for orientation Default value 100 16 0 20 0 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 0 0000 63 60 15 100 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Encoder
[Preparation] The accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from the motor shaft to the encoder rotation shaft is required. Confirm that the correct number of gear teeth is set in SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB1). SP025 (GRA1) to SP028 (GRA4) = ACE SP029 (GRB1) to SP032 (GRB4) = BDF Note) SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) may be set by the customer, so confirm that the accurate values corresponding to the machine are set. 2) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown above. 1)
Spindle
(A to F are the number of gear teeth)
Motor
VI - 5
1.3.7 Preparation for magnetic sensor orientation adjustment

Parameter No. SP001 SP004 SP005 SP006 SP007 SP025 SP026 SP027 SP028 SP029 SP030 SP031 SP032 SP097 SP098 SP099 SP100 SP105 SP106 SP107 SP108 SP109 SP119 SP120 SP121 SP122 SP123 SP124 SP125 Abbrev. PGM OINP OSP CSP OPST GRA1 GRA2 GRA3 GRA4 GRB1 GRB2 GRB3 GRB4 SPECO VGOP VGOI VGOD IQGO IDGO CSP2 CSP3 CSP4 MPGH MPGL MPCSH MPCSL MGD0 MGD1 MGD2 Name Position loop gain during orientation for magnetic sensor, motor-built-in encoder Orientation in-position width Orientation changeover speed limit value Deceleration rate at orientation Orientation position shift amount Number of spindle side gear teeth 1 Number of spindle side gear teeth 2 Number of spindle side gear teeth 3 Number of spindle side gear teeth 4 Number of motor side gear teeth 1 Number of motor side gear teeth 2 Number of motor side gear teeth 3 Number of motor side gear teeth 4 Orientation specifications Speed loop gain proportional item for orientation Speed loop gain integral item for orientation Speed loop gain delay/advance item for orientation Current loop gain magnification for orientation 1 Current loop gain magnification for orientation 2 Orientation deceleration rate 2 Orientation deceleration rate 3 Orientation deceleration rate 4 Orientation position loop gain H coil compensation magnification Orientation position loop gain L coil compensation magnification Deceleration rate H coil magnification for orientation Deceleration rate L coil magnification for orientation Magnetic sensor output peak value Magnetic sensor linear zone width Magnetic sensor changeover point Default value 100 16 0 20 0 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 1 to 32767 0000 63 60 15 100 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Standard magnet = 542 Compact magnet = 500 Standard magnet = 768 Compact magnet = 440 Standard magnet = 384 Compact magnet = 220
Spindle
[Preparation] The accurate gear ratio (or pulley ratio) from the motor shaft to the magnetic sensor rotation shaft is required. Confirm that the correct number of gear teeth is set in SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB1). SP025 (GRA1) to SP028 (GRA4) = ACE SP029 (GRB1) to SP032 (GRB4) = BDF Note) SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) may be set by the customer, so confirm that the accurate values corresponding to the machine are set. 2) Confirm that the parameters are set as shown above. VI - 6 1)
(A to F are the number of gear teeth)
Motor
1.3.8 Adjusting the orientation

[Adjustment] (Parameters that differ only during encoder orientation are indicated in parentheses {}.) (1) Adjusting the orientation position shift There is no potentiometer or rotary switch for the position shift. Set the position shift with SP007 (OPST). Change and adjust the SP007 (OPST) setting so that the target stop point is attained. (2) Orientation
Normal rotation speed Orientation changeover speed
Adjust with the following procedures according to the orientation state. Adjustment procedure Phenomenon SP001 (PGM) { SP002 (PGE) } SP006 (CSP) Note 1)
: Increase the setting value : Do not change the setting value : Decrease the setting value Note 2) The excessive error alarm will also occur when the detector direction SP097 (SPEC0) is incorrectly set. Adjust SP001 (PGM) { SP002 (PGE) } first, and then adjust SP006 (CSP). When adjusting the shortest orientation time for each gear stage, adjust SP107 (CSP2), SP108 (CSP3) and SP109 (CSP4) in the same manner. When using a coil changeover motor and adjusting the shortest orientation time for each coil, adjust SP119 (MPGH), SP120 (MPGL), SP121 (MPCSH) and SP122 (MPCSL) in the same manner. If the gear ratio is large (for example, 1:10), and the excessive error alarm occurs and the state cannot be fixed with the above adjustments, adjust SP005 (OPSP). If the spindle slowly rotates in the forward/reverse run directions during magnetic sensor orientation and does not stop, change the setting for the detector installation bit with SP097 (SPEC0). Motor overtravels when stopping Orientation time is long Motor hunts when stopping Excessive error alarm occurs
1.3.9 Adjusting the servo rigidity

Use the following adjustments to improve the servo rigidity during orientation stop. 1) Raise the position loop gain to the degree that the motor does not overtravel during orientation stop. Motor built-in encoder orientation, magnetic sensor orientation: Increase the SP001 (PGM) value. Encoder orientation : Increase the SP002 (PGE) value. 2) Raise the SP098 (VGOP) and SP099 (VGO1) values at the same rate to the degree that vibration does not occur during orientation stop. For example, if SP098 (VGOP) is set to 80, set SP099 (VGO1) to 80. 3) The impact response at stopping can be improved by increasing the SP100 (VGOD) value. However, when this value is increased, the torque in respect to the position deviation will drop, resulting in an adverse effect such as variation of the orientation stop position. PI control is applied when this value is set to "0". VI - 7
1.3.10 Delay/advance control and PI control

Select delay/advance control for normal orientation. (SP100 (VGOD) 0) Select PI control in the following cases. (SP100 (VGOD) = 0) When the spindle's static friction torque is large, and a stopping position accuracy is required During PI control, the servo rigidity will drop slightly compared to delay/advance control. Thus, make a selection that matches the machine specifications.
1.3.11 Troubleshooting for orientation trouble

(1) Orientation does not take place. (The motor keeps running.) Cause Parameter setting value is inappropriate Investigation item Remedy Remarks The orientation detector and parameter do not match. Correctly set SP037 (SFNC5) Motor built-in encoder orientation 4 SP037 (SFNC5). Encoder orientation 1 Magnetic sensor orientation 2 Change to a motor having a motor built-in encoder with Z-phase. For motor built-in encoder orientation
Orientation is attempted with the The motor built-in encoder using a specifications do standard motor instead of a motor not match with Z-phase. The connector pin numbers are incorrect, or the inserted connector number is incorrect, or the cable is broken.
Wiring mistake
Correctly wire. Replace the wire.
(2) The motor overtravels and stops. Cause Parameter setting value is inappropriate Investigation item The gear ratio parameters SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) are not correct. The state is improved when the deceleration rate parameter for orientation SP006 (CSP) is halved. Remedy Correctly set SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4). Readjust SP006 (CSP). This also applies to: SP107 (CSP2) SP108 (CSP3) SP109 (CSP4) SP121 (MPCSH) SP122 (MPGL) This also applies to: SP119 (MPGH) SP122 (MPGL) Remarks
The state is improved when the Readjust SP001 (PGM) position loop gain parameters and SP002 (PGE) SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE) are halved. The orientation stop direction is uni-directional (CCW or CW). Set bit 0 and 1 of SP097 (SPEC0) to "0".
VI - 8
(3) The stopping position deviates. Cause Mechanical cause Investigation item The stop position is not deviated on the encoder shaft. Remedy Remarks There is backlash or slip, For encoder etc., between the spindle and orientation encoder. The gear ratio between the spindle and encoder is not 1:1 or 1:2. There is backlash or slip, For motor etc., between the spindle and built-in encoder motor. orientation The gear ratio between the spindle and motor is not 1:1. Noise The position detector cable is relayed Do not relay the cable. with a terminal block (connector), etc. The position detector cable shield is Properly treat the shield. not properly treated. Too much signal wire is peeled and exposed at the connector section of the position detector cable. (The section with no shield is long.) Keep the peeled and exposed section to 3cm or less when possible. Separate the peeled and exposed section from the drive wire.
(4) The stopping position does not change even when the position shift parameter is changed. Cause Parameter setting value is inappropriate Investigation item The position shift was changed from 2048 when the gear ratio between the spindle and encoder is 1:2 (one encoder rotation with two spindle rotations). Remedy If the gear ratio between the spindle and encoder is 1:2, the position shift amount for one spindle rotation is 2048 and not 4096. Remarks
(5) Vibration occurs when stopping. Cause Parameter setting value is inappropriate Investigation item The gear ratio parameters SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4) are not correct. Remedy Correctly set SP025 (GRA1) to SP032 (GRB4). Decrease the position loop gain parameters SP001 (PGM) and SP002 (PGE). Increase the current loop gain parameters for orientation SP105 (IQG0) and SP106 (IDG0). Decrease the speed loop gain parameters for orientation SP098 (VG0P) and SP099 (VG010). Decrease the current loop gain parameters for orientation SP015 (IQG0) and SP106 (IDG0). Remarks
Orientation is not The vibration frequency is several properly hertz. adjusted
The vibration frequency is 10Hz or more.
VI - 9
(6) The orientation complete signal is not output. Cause The machine load is heavy Investigation item Decrease the in-position parameter PS004 (OINP). The state is improved when the control for orientation stop is changed from delay/advance to PI control. Remedy Review the in-position range, and increase SP004 (OINP). Review the speed loop gain parameters for orientation SP098 (VG0P), SP099 (VG0I) and SP100 (VG0D). Remarks Refer to section (1) Orientation does not take place.
1.4 Adjusting the synchronous tap

Refer to the "CNC Specifications Manual" for details on the adjustment procedures.
VI - 10
2. Troubleshooting
2. Troubleshooting
WARNING
1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned OFF before starting maintenance or inspections. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults. 2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or Service Station for repairs and part replacement.
2.1 Introduction
If any trouble occurs in the control unit, check the following items first. Then, carry out the inspections and repairs explained in this section. The following information is extremely useful when contacting the machine tool builder's Service Department. Items to confirm at trouble occurrence
Notice on the spindle amplifier.

1.
Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement)
Check the 7-segment display on the drive unit or the monitor screen on the personal computer to confirm which alarm is displayed on the drive unit. Also check the past alarms. (Refer to VI-15 List of alarms and warnings.) 2. Can the fault or abnormality be repeated? 3. Is the ambient temperature and inner-panel temperature correct? 4. Was the motor accelerating, decelerating or in constant speed operation? What was the speed? 5. Does the state differ during forward run and reverse run? 6. Did an instantaneous power failure occur? 7. Did the problem occur at a specific operation or command? 8. At what frequency does the problem occur? 9. Does the problem occur when the load is applied or removed? 10. Were any remedial measures, etc., taken? 11. How many years has the equipment been in use? 12. Is the power voltage correct? Does it fluctuate greatly depending on the time?
2.2 Step 1
Check the following items as step 1 of troubleshooting. (1) Power voltage ... 200V (+10% -15%) 50Hz, 200 to 230V (+10% -15%) 60Hz. The power voltage does not drop below 200 -15% for even a short time. (Example) The voltage drops at a set time each day. The voltage drops when a specific machine is started. (2) Are the control functions around the unit normal? (Example) Are the NC and sequence circuit, etc., normal? Visually check for any problems with the wiring, etc. (3) Is the control unit's ambient temperature (inner-panel temperature) 55C or less? (4) Are there any abnormalities in the unit's appearance? (Example) Loosening of the connected connectors, damage, entry of foreign matter, etc.
VI - 11
2. Troubleshooting
The general problem can be approximately pinpointed by carefully confirming the above state. The MDS-A-CV and SP problems are largely classified into the following types. The controller power was turned ON for the first time, but normal operation was not possible. (I) The system operates normally, but suddenly malfunctions. (II) Normal operation does not take place sometimes. The orientation stop position deviates. An alarm is displayed. (III)
Fault class A
Power supply unit fault Resistance regeneration converter unit fault Spindle drive unit fault Detector fault Motor speed detection encoder fault 1024p/rev encoder fault Magnetic sensor fault Fault in parameters or data transmitted from personal computer Power supply fault Motor fault Other fault (Incorrect conditions for input signals, broken cable, etc.)
Unit fault
2.3 Step 2
Fault class I The controller power was turned ON for the first time, but normal operation was not possible. Investigation item Remedy
The controller is strictly tested before shipment. Normal operation when the power is turned ON for the first time may not be possible due to: (1) The unit was bumped against (1) Visually check the unit appearance for something and damaged during abnormal points. operation or installation. (2) Incorrect or broken external wiring or sequence. Is the ground wire correctly wired? Note that the power phase order is irrelevant. (3) Are the parameter settings correct? (4) The motor speed does not increase. (2) Check that the unit's 7-segment LED is ON. Check that the external wiring and sequence are complete. (Note 1) Check the input/output signals to the unit with the personal computer's monitor screen or with an oscilloscope. (3) Check the spindle parameters. (4) Check that the motor's UVW wires are correctly connected. When using the built-in motor, check that the speed detector's output waveform is correct.
VI - 12
2. Troubleshooting
Fault class I
Investigation item
Remedy
(5) Operation is normal when motor (5) Check that the load state is as designed. is run as an isolated unit. (6) Orientation stop is incorrect (overtravels, etc.) (7) An alarm is displayed on the unit's 7-segment. (6) Adjust the orientation. (7) Check section "2.5 Approach per phenomenon".
(Note 1) Turn the start signal SRN and SRI input ON at least one second after the READY signal is input.
Fault class II The system operates normally, but suddenly malfunctions.
Investigation item
Remedy
(1) Check the input power voltage. (1) If the power voltage is abnormal, return it to 200VAC +10% -15% 50Hz the correct level. 200 to 230VAC +10% -15% Secure a power capacity that can maintain 60Hz the voltages given on the left even during a transient state (during acceleration/deceleration, during cutting). (2) An alarm is displayed on the unit's 7-segment. (3) Are the signals input from the NC (PC) correct? (4) Is each detector's output waveform correct? Built-in speed detector 1024P/rev encoder Magnetic sensor (2) Check section "2.5 Approach per phenomenon". (3) Check with the personal computer's Monitor screen, or check the DIO and S-analog voltage with an oscilloscope. (4) Check the waveform with an oscilloscope. Then, readjust or replace.
Fault class III Normal operation does not take place sometimes. The orientation stop position deviates. An alarm is displayed, but normal operation is restored when the power is turned ON again or reset.
Investigation item When this occurs, it is necessary to completely understand the state of occurrence. (Load state, operation mode, etc.) The following three causes can be considered:
Remedy
(1) The input power instantly fails or (1) Investigate in detail for fluctuation of the input power, etc. instantly drops, and an instantaneous power failure error is displayed.
VI - 13
2. Troubleshooting
Fault class III
Investigation item (2) The control circuit malfunctioned due to abnormally large noise, etc. The unit can withstand power line noise up to 1600V/1us. (3) Orientation is incorrect. The orientation stop position deviates. The orientation time is long.
Remedy (2) Find the source of the noise and install a surge killer, etc. Review the connection of the unit's grounding, and detector's shield and grounding, etc. (3) Adjust the orientation parameters again. (Change the SP001, 002 and 006 setting values.) When using the 1024P/rev encoder, investigate the backlash between the spindle and encoder.
VI - 14
2. Troubleshooting
2.4 List of alarms and warnings

Alarm Abbrev. Name No. 12 ME Memory error 13 17 20 21 23 31 32 37 3B 3F 40 41 42 46 50 51 52 5C 61 to 6E 6F 70 to 77 88 8A 8B 8C A9 E1 E4 E7 SWE ADE Software processing error AD error Operation A check sum or RAM check error occurred in the spindle drive unit's control a card ROM. The software data process did not end within the set time. a Details a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a a b b b c
Resetting method
AR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR PR Note 2 AR Note 2 Note 2 AR PR PR PR -
The current detection AD converter did not function correctly during initialization. NS1 No signal The motor PLG's Z phase signal was not input, or the signal was not at the (motor PLG - Z phase) correct level. NS No signal The signal was not input from the spindle encoder, or was not at the correct (spindle encoder) level. OSE Excessive speed The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the specified deflection value (50r/min: fixed value), and the state continued for a specified time. OS Overspeed The motor's actual speed exceeded 115% of the set maximum speed. PMOC Power module A current exceeding the set value flowed into the IPM used in the spindle overcurrent drive's main circuit. PE Parameter error A parameter exceeding the tolerable range was set. PMOH Power module overheat The IPM used in the spindle drive unit's main circuit overheated. OSE2 Excessive speed The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the specified deflection 2 value (SP194 setting value: %), and the state continued for a specified time. KE1 TK unit change error The changeover signal procedure was mistaken when using the TK unit. KE2 TK unit communication The communication with the TK unit was not correct when using the TK error unit. PLE PLG feedback error When PLG automatic adjustment was carried out, the A and B phase signal offset was greatly deviated. OHM Motor overheat Overload, or the motor cooling blower stopped and the motor overheated causing the built-in thermal protector to function. OL Overload The motor exceeded the overload detection level for a time longer than the detection time constant. OL2 Overload 2 A load exceeding the continuous rating was applied on the motor for longer than the specified time. OD Excessive error The position tracking error exceeded the specified value during orientation. ORFE Orientation feedback The feedback counter value exceeded the specified value when orientation error was completed. Power supply alarm An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. PSE Power supply not connected Power supply alarm (1) The power supply unit is not connected. (2) An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. An alarm occurred in the power supply unit. The spindle drive unit's software process did not end within the set time. Data communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. A parameter conversion request was issued from TOSNUC while the spindle drive unit was in the gate ON state. Synchronized communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. The spindle drive unit is retrying orientation. The motor current exceeded the overload detection level for a time 80% or more of the detection time constant. When setting the parameters after turning the spindle drive unit power ON, a value exceeding the tolerable range was set. The emergency stop warning was input from TOSNUC.
Watch dog TOSNUC communication error 1 TPE Parameter conversion error TE2 TOSNUC communication error 2 WOFE Orientation feedback error warning WOL Overload warning WPE NCE Parameter error warning Emergency stop warning
WD TE1
Note 1) If the above protective functions activate, the alarm No. will appear on the spindle drive unit's 7-segment LED, and the following operation will take place. The resetting methods are listed below. [Operation] a : The base interception is carried out for the spindle drive unit, the external contactor turns OFF, and the motor coasts to a stop. b : Only a warning is displayed. Operation continues. c : The motor decelerates to a stop with regenerative braking. Then, the base interception is carried out, and the external contactor turns OFF momentarily. [Resetting methods] AR : Turn the spindle drive unit and power supply power OFF once. PR : Input the reset signal from TOSNUC. - : Operation is automatically resumed after the warning is reset. Note that if the emergency stop warning occurs, the start signal must be turned OFF once. (Except during orientation.) Note 2) If an alarm occurs in the power supply unit, a value between 61 and 77 will appear on the LED. Refer to (2) Power supply unit on the next page for details on the alarm and the resetting methods. Note 3) If parameter SP038 (SFNC6)-bit 0 is set to "1", operation "c" will take place for alarm Nos. 21, 46 and 52. Note that in this case, the external contactor will turn OFF immediately after the motor stops regardless of the parameter SP192 (FNC0) setting.
VI - 15
2. Troubleshooting
2.5 Approach per phenomenon

2.5.1 Details when alarm or warning is displayed on the 7-segment display
(1) Alarm No. 12 : Memory error 1 [Meaning] A check sum or RAM check error occurred in the spindle drive units internal ROM.
Investigation item 1 Investigate the repeatability. Investigation results Occurs each time the power is turned ON. Occurs periodically. 2 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating noise near the unit? 1) The grounding is incomplete. Remedy Replace the spindle drive unit. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly ground.
2) The alarm occurs easily when certain Take noise prevention measures for the device operates. left device. No special problem Replace the spindle drive unit.
(2) Alarm No. 13 : Software processing error [Meaning] The spindle drive units software data process did not end within the set time.
(3) Alarm No. 17 : AD error [Meaning] The current detection A/D converter circuit in the spindle drive unit did not function correctly during initialization.
(4) Alarm No. 20 : No signal (motor PLG - Z phase) [Meaning] Error in the Z phase signal of the motor speed detection PLG.
Investigation item 1 Check the spindle parameter (SP037: SFNC5) setting value. Check the speed detector waveform. Investigation results Occurs each time the power is turned ON. Occurs periodically. 2 The waveform is not correct. Remedy Replace the spindle drive unit. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect. Replace the spindle drive unit or detector.
The waveform is correct. 3 Turn the power OFF, and check the The connection is faulty or broken. detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct.
VI - 16
2. Troubleshooting
(5) Alarm No. 21 : No signal detection [Meaning] Error in the 1024P/rev encoder for orientation or 90,000 pulse encoder for C axis A, B, Z phase signals.
Investigation item 1 Check the spindle parameter (SP037: SFNC5) setting value. Investigation results Bit 0 is set to "1" even though encoder orientation is not used. No special problem 2 Tug the connector to check if the Is disconnected (loose). detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). side and detector side) is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Correctly set. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect. Replace the spindle drive unit or detector. Remedy
(6) Alarm No. 23 : Excessive speed deflection [Meaning] The speed command and current motor speed difference exceeded 50rpm for 12 seconds or more.
Investigation item 1 2 Check the UVW wiring between the spindle drive unit and motor. Check the spindle parameter (SP034, SP040, SP055, SP257 and following) setting value. Investigation results The wiring is not correct. The wiring is correct. The values are not correct. The correct values are set. Correctly wire. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly set. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Increase the spindle parameter (SP055) setting value. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Remedy
Measure the acceleration/deceleration Takes more 12 sec. or more. time to the spindle maximum speed. If the alarm occurs when changing from Takes 12 sec. or less. forward run (reverse run) to reverse run (forward run), measure the time from the forward run (reverse run) maximum speed to the reverse run (forward run) maximum speed. If the alarm occurs during cutting, check The load amount is 120% or higher. the load amount. The load amount is 119% or lower. Tug the connector to check if the speed Is disconnected (loose). detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). side and detector side) is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct.
4 5
Decrease the load. Investigate item 5, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 6, and remedy. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect. Investigate item 7, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Replace the spindle drive unit.
The waveform is correct.
VI - 17
2. Troubleshooting
(7) Alarm No. 31 : Overspeed [Meaning] The motor speed exceeded 115% of the value set in spindle parameter (SP017:TSP).
Investigation item 1 2 3 Investigate the repeatability. Check the spindle parameter (SP017: TSP) setting value. Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating noise near the unit? 3) Are the speed and position detector cables correctly shielded? Check the speed detector waveform. Investigation results Occurs constantly. The setting value is "2000" or less. The setting value is "2001" or more. 1) The grounding is incomplete. Remedy Investigate item 3, and remedy. Increase the setting value. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Correctly ground. Occurs only during speed loop operation. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
2) The alarm occurs easily when certain Take noise prevention measures for the device operates. left device. 3) The cables are correctly shielded. No special problem The waveform is not correct. Correctly shield the cables. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Replace the spindle drive unit.
VI - 18
2. Troubleshooting
(8) Alarm No. 32 : Power module error [Meaning] One of the following errors occurred in the IPM used by the spindle drive unit. 1) The overcurrent protection functioned. 2) The IPM internal temperature rose above a set value. 3) The base power voltage dropped.
Investigation item 1 2 Investigation results Occurs after servo ON. Check the spindle parameter (SP034, SP040, SP055, SP257 and following) setting value. The values are not correct. The correct values are set. Remedy Replace the spindle drive unit. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly set. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Decrease the load. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Correctly set. Change the setting values as explained for SP067 to SP069. Try increasing the SP270 to SP273 setting values by two to three fold. Try setting the SP276 and SP277 setting values to 0. Investigate item 5, and remedy. 5 If the alarm occurs the instant that the motor starts accelerating or decelerating, check the spindle parameter (SP046) value. Check the U, V and W wiring between the spindle drive unit and motor. 1) Are any terminal screws loose? 2) Is the wire short-circuited between the phases? 3) Is there a ground fault at any phase? Open both ends of the cable when checking items 2) and 3). Check the motor insulation. Perform a megger test between each motor wire and ground. Check the spindle drive unit's cooling fan. Check the power voltage. The values are not correct. The correct values are set. Correctly set. Try setting a value between 1 and 8 in SP046. (Setting 1 is the most effective.) Investigate item 6, and remedy. 1) The screws are loose. 2) There is a short circuit. 3) There is a ground fault. No special problem Tighten. Replace the cable. Replace the cable. Investigate item 7, and remedy. Check when the phenomenon occurred. Occurs before ready ON.
3 4
If the alarm occurs during cutting, check The load amount is 120% or higher. the load amount. The load amount is 119% or lower. If the alarm occurs when the motor is decelerating from speed of 8000rpm or more, check the spindle parameters (SP067, SP068, SP069). When using special motor constants, check the (SP270 to SP273, SP276, SP277) setting values. The values are not correct. The correct values are set.
The resistance value is 1M or less. The resistance value is more than 1M. The cooling fan is stopped. The cooling fan is rotating correctly. The power voltage drops below 170V during acceleration/deceleration and cutting. The power voltage is always 171V or more.
Replace the motor. Investigate item 8, and remedy. Replace the spindle drive unit. Investigate item 9, and remedy. Review the power capacity.
8 9
Investigate item 10, and remedy. Correctly ground.
10 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating noise near the unit?
1) The grounding is incomplete.
VI - 19
2. Troubleshooting
(9) Alarm No. 37 : Parameter error [Meaning] An illegal spindle parameter was found during initialization.
Investigation item 1 Investigation results Correctly set. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Remedy Check the spindle parameter setting An incorrect value is set. values. No special problem The incorrectly set parameter number is displayed with the spindle drive unit's LED or personal computer's monitor screen. Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating noise near the unit? 1) The grounding is incomplete.
Correctly ground.
(10) Alarm No. 3B : Power module overheat [Meaning] Overheating of the IPM used in the spindle drive units main circuit was detected.
Investigation item 1 Check the heat radiation environment. Check the rotation of the fan on the back The fan is not rotating correctly. of the unit. Check for contamination of heat radiating fins on back of unit. The heat radiating fins are heavily contaminated with cutting oil and dust, etc. Replace the fan. Clean the fins. Take measures so that cutting oil and dust do not get on the fins. Investigation results Remedy
Measure the unit's ambient temperature The temperature exceeds 55C. Nothing applies. 2 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating noise near the unit? 1) The grounding is incomplete.
Consider means to ventilate and cool the panel. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly ground.
(11) Alarm No. 3F : Excessive speed deflection 2 [Meaning] The speed command and motor speed deflection exceeded the tolerable value set in the parameter (SP194), and the state continued for a specified time (SP195).
Investigation item 1 Check the spindle parameter setting values. Investigation results An incorrect value is set, or the setting value is too small. No special problem Correctly set. Investigate items 3 and following for alarm No. 23 (excessive speed deflection). Remedy
VI - 20
2. Troubleshooting
(12) Alarm No. 40 : TK unit change error [Meaning] The changeover signal procedure was mistaken when using the TK unit.
Investigation item 1 Refer to the separate 1-amplifier 2-motor specifications (BNP-A-2993-22). Investigation results Remedy
(13) Alarm No. 41 : TK unit communication error [Meaning] The communication between the TK unit and spindle drive unit was not correct when using the TK unit.
Investigation item 1 Refer to the separate 1-amplifier 2-motor specifications (BNP-A-2993-22). Investigation results Remedy
(14) Alarm No. 46 : Motor overheat [Meaning] The motor overheated and the thermal protector built-in the motor overheated.
When this alarm occurs, it cannot be reset until the motor has stopped and the motor cooling fan has run for 10 or more minutes.
Investigation item 1 Investigate the repeatability.
Investigation results Occurs immediately after turning power ON. Occurs several minutes after operation starts. Occurs after operating for a while.
Remedy Investigate item 2, and remedy.
Investigate item 5, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Correctly connect. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Replace the motor. Replace the spindle drive unit. Decrease the starting/stopping frequency or lower the load. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
Tug the speed detector cable connector Is disconnected (loose). on the spindle drive unit to see if it is No special problem disconnected. Check the speed detector cable connection. A connection defect is found. The connection is correct.
3 4
Check between OHS1 and OHS2 on the The resistance value is several 100 or motor thermal protector with a tester. higher. The resistance value is 10 or lower. Check the spindle load amount. The unit is started and stopped frequently, or the cutting load is large. No special problem
Check the motor cooling fan wiring and The motor cooling fan wiring is incorrect. Correctly wire. rotation. The wiring is correct but the fan does not Replace the motor. rotate. No special problem Investigate item 7, and remedy. Clean. Replace the spindle drive unit. Check the finger guard on the motor cooling fan section. The finger guard is clogged. No special problem
VI - 21
2. Troubleshooting
(15) Alarm No. 50 : Overload Alarm No. 51 : Overload [Meaning] Alarm No. 50 The current flowing to the spindle motor exceeded the overload detection level (spindle parameter SP064: OLL) and continued longer than the overload detection time (spindle parameter SP063: OLT). Alarm No. 51 A load exceeding the spindle motor's continuous rating was applied for longer than the specified time.
Investigation item 1 Check the spindle parameter (SP034, SP040, SP055, SP257 and following) setting value. Check the spindle parameter (SP063 and SP064) setting value. Check the U, V and W wiring between the spindle drive unit and motor. 1) Are any terminal screws loose? 2) Is the wire short-circuited between the phases? 3) Is there a ground fault at any phase? Open both ends of the cable when checking items 2) and 3). Investigation results The values are not correct. The correct values are set. The standard value is not set. The standard value is set. 1) The screws are loose. 2) There is a short circuit. 3) There is a ground fault. No special problem Correctly set. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Set the standard value. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Tighten. Replace the cable. Replace the cable. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Remedy
2 3
Tug the connector to check if the speed Is disconnected (loose). detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). side and detector side) is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct.
Correctly install. Investigate item 5, and remedy. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect. Investigate item 6, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Investigate item 7, and remedy. Decrease the load to within the motor rating. Investigate item 8, and remedy. Review the machine side. Replace the spindle drive unit.
The waveform is correct. 7 Check the motor load amount. The load amount exceeds the motor rating. No special problem 8 Check the motor rotation. The motor is locked. No special problem
VI - 22
2. Troubleshooting
(16) Alarm No. 52 : Excessive error [Meaning] The position tracking error exceeded the specified value (excessive error width setting value) during orientation. excessive error width setting value (SP102: OODR): Standard value 32767 (32767 pulses)
Investigation item 1 2 Investigate the repeatability. Investigation results Occurs during orientation. Remedy Investigate item 2, and remedy. Change the bit 5 setting value. Return the bit 5 setting value to the original value, investigate item 3, and remedy. Change the setting values. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 5, and remedy.
If the alarm occurs during encoder OK if the bit 5 setting value is changed. orientation, check the spindle parameter NG even if the bit 5 setting value is (SP097: SPEC0) bit 5 setting value. changed. Check the spindle parameter (SP001: PGM, SP002: PGE, SP006: CSP) setting value. Tug the connector to check if the position/speed detector connectors (spindle drive unit side and position/speed detector sides) are disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the position/speed detector cable connections with a tester. Check the speed detector waveform. OK if PGM and PGE are doubled or if CSP is decreased to half. NG even with the above settings. Is disconnected (loose). Is not disconnected (loose).
The connection is faulty or broken. The connection is correct. The waveform is not correct.
Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect. Investigate item 6, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Replace the spindle drive unit or position detector.
(17) Alarm No. 5C : Orientation feedback error [Meaning] The command and feedback difference exceeded the setting value (SP114: OPER) when orientation in-position was completed.
Investigation item 1 2 3 Is the speed detector cable correctly shielded? Is the encoder cable relayed? Extend and contract the encoder or speed detector cable, and check whether it is broken with a tester. Check whether the speed detector's A, B and Z phase waveform is adjausted. Investigation results The cable is not correctly shielded. The cable is correctly shielded. The cable is relayed. The cable is not relayed. The cable is broken. The cable is not broken. The waveform is deviated. The waveform is correct. Remedy Correctly shield the cable. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Use one encoder cable. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Replace the cable. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Correctly adjust. Refer to adjustment procedures (BFN-14052-01) Investigate item 4 for the spindle, and remedy.
(18) Alarm No. 61 to 7F : Power supply alarm [Meaning] An error was detected in the power supply unit.
Investigation item 1 Refer to the troubleshooting section for the power supply. Investigation results Remedy
VI - 23
2. Troubleshooting
(19) Alarm No. 8A 8B 8C : TOSNUC communication error 1/Parameter conversion error/ TOSNUC communication error 2 [Meaning] 8A: Data communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly. 8B: A parameter conversion request was issued from TOSNUC while the spindle drive unit was in the gate ON state. 8C: Synchronized communication with TOSNUC was not completed correctly, or an illegal spindle parameter was found during initialization.
Investigation item 1 Investigation results Correctly install. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Remedy Tug the connection connectors or Is disconnected (loose). terminating connectors between the NC Excessive force is applied. and spindle drive units to check if they No special problem are disconnected. Also check if an excessive force is being applied on the connectors. Disconnect each cable in item 1, and check the connection with a tester. Investigate the wiring and installation environment. 1) Is the unit correctly grounded? 2) Is there any equipment generating noise near the unit? A connection defect is found. No connection defect was found. 1) The grounding is incomplete.
2 3
Replace the cable Investigate item 3, and remedy. Correctly ground.
2) The alarm occurs easily when certain Take noise prevention measures for the device operates. left device. No special problem Check and remedy the Toshiba Machine CNC hardware, etc. If the problem still cannot be remedied, replace the spindle drive unit.
(19) Warning No. E1 : Overload warning [Meaning] The current flowing to the spindle motor exceeded the overload detection level (spindle parameter SP064: OLL) and the time exceeded 80% of the overload detection time (spindle parameter SP063: OLT).
Investigation item 1 Perform the same investigation and remedies as for alarm No. 50. Investigation results Remedy
(20) Warning No. E7 : Emergency stop [Meaning] An emergency stop signal was input from an external source.
Investigation item 1 2 3 Check whether the emergency stop switch is on. Tug the DIO connector to check if it is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the position/speed detector cable connections with a tester. Confirm that the +24V power for DIO is correctly connected and supplied. Investigation results Switch is ON. Switch is OFF. Is disconnected (loose). Is not disconnected (loose). The connection is faulty or broken. Remedy Turn OFF the emergency stop switch. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Replace the detector cable. Correctly connect. Investigate item 4, and remedy. The connection is faulty, or the power is not supplied. The connection is correct. Correctly connect. Supply the +24V power. Replace the spindle amplifier.
VI - 24
2. Troubleshooting
2.5.2 Details when alarm or warning is not displayed on 7-segment unit

(1) No abnormality is displayed, but the motor does not rotate.
Investigation item 1 Investigation results Remedy Correctly wire. Tighten the screws. Replace the wires. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Supply the +24V power. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Check the wiring around the power The wiring is incorrect. Loose screws or supply unit and spindle drive unit. broken wires are found. Also check for looseness in the terminal No special problem screws and for broken wires, etc. Tug the connectors to check whether they are disconnected. Check that the +24V power for DIO is correctly supplied. Check the input voltage. Check all spindle parameters. Check the input signals. Are the READY, forward run, reverse run signals input? The forward and reverse run signals must be input at least one second after READY ON. The forward run and reverse run signals may be turned ON simultaneously. Check the speed command. Is disconnected (loose). Is not disconnected (loose). The power is not supplied. The power is supplied.
2 3 4 5 6
The voltage exceeds the specified value. Restore the power to the specified value. The voltage is within the specified value. Investigate item 5, and remedy. The correct values are not set. The correct values are set. Set the correct values. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
The signal is not input or the sequence is Correct the input signals. incorrect. The orientation command is input. No special problem Investigate item 7, and remedy.
The speed command is not correctly input. The speed command is input correctly.
Correctly input the speed command. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(2) No fault is displayed, but the motor only rotates slowly, or a large noise is heard from the motor.
Investigation item 1 2 Check the U, V and W wiring between the spindle drive unit and motor Check the input voltage. Investigation results The wiring is not correct. The wiring is correct. One of the three phases is not the specified value. No special problem 3 Check the speed command. The speed command is not correctly input. The speed command is input correctly. 4 Tug the connector to check if the speed Is disconnected (loose). detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). side and speed detector side) is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct. Correctly wire. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Restore the power to the specified value. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Correctly input the speed command. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 5, and remedy. Remedy
Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected. Investigate item 6, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Replace the spindle drive.
VI - 25
2. Troubleshooting
(3) The rotation speed command and actual rotation speed do not match.
Investigation item 1 Check the speed command. Investigation results The speed command is not input correctly. The speed command is correct. 2 Check for slips between the motor and spindle. (If the belt or clutch are connected.) Check the spindle parameters (SP034, SP040, SP017, SP257 and following). Slipping is found. No special problem The correct values are not set. The correct values are set. Remedy Input the correct speed command. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Repair the machine side. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Set the correct values. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(4) The starting time is long or has increased in length.

Investigation item 1 2 3 Check if the friction torque has increased. Rotate the motor bearings by hand to see that they are normal. Check if the torque limit signal is being input. Investigation results The torque has increased. No special problem The bearings do not rotate smoothly. The bearings rotate smoothly. The signal is input. The signal is not input. Remedy Repair the machine side. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Replace the spindle motor. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Do not input the signal. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(5) The motor stops during cutting.

Investigation item 1 Check the load amount during cutting. Investigation results The load meter indicates a value higher than 120% during cutting. No special problem 2 Perform the same investigation and remedies as for item (4). Remedy Decrease the load. Investigate item 2, and remedy.
(6) The vibration and noise (gear noise), etc., are large.
Investigation item 1 Investigation results Remedy Check the machine's dynamic balance. The same sound is heard during coast to Repair the machine side. (Coast to a stop from the maximum stop. speed.) No special problem Investigate item 2, and remedy. Check for a resonance point on the machine. (Coast to a stop from the maximum speed.) Check the machine backlash. The vibration and sound increases at a certain speed during coast to stop. No special problem Backlash is large. No special problem 4 Repair the machine side. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Repair the machine side. Investigate item 4, and remedy.
Confirm the spindle parameter (SP022: The phenomenon decreases when the Change the setting. Note that the impact VGNP1, SP023: VGN11, SP056: setting value is lowered to half. response will decrease. PYVR) settings. No change even with the above settings. Return the setting value to the original value, perform investigation item 5, and remedy. Tug the connector to check if the speed Is disconnected (loose). detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). side and speed detector side) is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct. Correctly install. Investigate item 6, and remedy.
Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected. Investigate item 8, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Investigate item 7, and remedy. Change the setting value.
The waveform is correct. 8 Confirm the spindle parameter (SP067, The state is reduced when the setting is SP068 and SP069) changed as explained in SP067 to SP069. The state does not change even when the above setting is made.
Replace the spindle drive unit.
VI - 26
2. Troubleshooting
(7) The spindle coasts during deceleration.

Investigation item 1 Check for slips between the motor and spindle. (If connected with a belt or clutch.) Investigation results Slipping is found. No special problem Remedy Repair the machine side. Replace the spindle drive unit.
(8) The rotation is not stable.

Investigation item 1 Investigation results Remedy Change the setting. Note that the gear sound may increase. Return the setting value to the original value, investigate item 2, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Confirm the spindle parameter (SP022: The rotation stabilizes when the setting VGNP1, SP023: VGNI1) values are doubled. The state does not change even when the above settings are made. 2 Tug the connector to check if the speed Is disconnected (loose). detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). side and speed detector side) is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. (Especially check the shield wiring.) Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct.
Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Investigate item 5, and set. Correctly ground. Investigate item 6, and set. Change the setting value.
The waveform is correct. 5 Investigate the wiring and installation environment. Is the unit correctly grounded? The grounding is incomplete. No special problem
Confirm the spindle parameter (SP067, The state is reduced when the setting is SP068 and SP069) changed as explained in SP067 to SP069. The state does not change even when the above setting is made.
Replace the spindle drive unit.
(9) The motor speed does not rise above a set speed.
Investigation item 1 Investigation results Remedy Correctly input the speed command. Investigate item 2, and remedy. Repair the machine side. Investigate item 3, and remedy. Replace the spindle motor. Investigate item 4, and remedy. Correctly install. Investigate item 5, and remedy. Check the speed command. The speed command is not correctly Check whether the override input on the input. machine operation panel is being input. The speed command is input correctly. Check whether the load has increased suddenly. Rotate the motor bearings by hand to see that they are normal. The load has increased. No special problem The bearings do not rotate smoothly. The bearings rotate smoothly.
2 3 4
Tug the connector to check if the speed Is disconnected (loose). detector connector (spindle drive unit Is not disconnected (loose). side and speed detector side) is disconnected. Turn the power OFF and check the The connection is faulty or broken. speed detector cable connection with a tester. The connection is correct. Check the speed detector waveform. The waveform is not correct.
Replace the detector cable. Correctly connected. Investigate item 6, and remedy. Adjust so that it is correct. (Refer to section VI-36.) Or, replace the detector. Replace the spindle drive unit.
VI - 27
2. Troubleshooting
2.6 Periodic inspections WARNING

1. Wait at least ten minutes after turning the 200V power supply OFF and confirm that the CHARGE lamp on the power supply unit (resistance regeneration converter unit) has turned OFF before starting maintenance or inspections. Failure to observe this could result in spindle amplifier damage or electric shock faults. 2. Only qualified technician must carry out the maintenance and inspections. Work carried out by other personnel could result in electric shocks. Contact your nearest Service Center or Service Station for repairs and part replacement. Maintenance and inspections are indispensable for attaining the device's fullest performance, preventing accidents beforehand, and continuing highly reliable operation for a long time.
Notice on the spindle amplifier's control circuit.

2.6.1 Inspecting the control unit
Inspection item Cooling fan
Never perform a megger test (insulation resistance measurement)
Inspection Points Remedy cycle Once a month (1) Does the fan rotate smoothly when rotated by hand? (2) Does the fan rotate powerfully when the power is turned ON? Replace the unit. (3) Are the bearings making any abnormal noise? Contamination As necessary Periodically clean the areas around the amplifier, especially the cooling and screw fan, and tighten the input/output terminals and connections. loosening Wiring As necessary Check that the wires are not contacting the conductive parts and that they are not caught.
2.6.2 Inspecting the motor

Inspection item Noise and vibration Inspection cycle Once a month Points Remedy
Temperature rise
Insulation resistance value
Cooling fan
Is there any new noise or abnormal vibration? Check the following items when there is any abnormality. (1) Check the foundation and installation. (2) Check the core alignment accuracy of the coupling. (3) Is any vibration conveyed from the coupler? Clean (4) Are the bearings damaged or making any abnormal noise? (5) Are the reduction gears or belt vibrating or making any abnormal noise? (6) Is there any abnormality in the control unit? (7) Is there any abnormality at the cooling fan section? (8) Is the belt tension appropriate? Once a month Is the bearing temperature normal? (Normally, approx. ambient temperature +10 to 40C.) Has the motor frame temperature changed from normal use? Check the following items when there is any abnormality. (1) Is the cooling fan rotating normally? (2) Is there anything caught in the cooling wind path (between frame and cover) thereby blocking the wind path? (3) Has the load increased abnormally? (4) Is there any abnormality in the control unit? Refer to section 2.5 Every Is the insulation resistance value abnormally low? 6 months Disconnect the wiring with the spindle drive unit, and perform a megger test between the circuit batch and ground. (No problem if the value is 1M or more when measured with a 500V megger tester.) If the insulation resistance is 1M or less, the inside of the motor must be cleaned and dried out. To dry, disassemble the motor and heat it in a dryer at a temperature less than 90C Weekly, Is the fan rotating normally and feeding wind? Is there any abnormal monthly noise or vibration? VI - 28
3. Disassembling and Assembling the Motor

3.1 Disassembling and assembling the SJ type AC spindle motor
1 Cable and PCB (1) Remove the cover of the terminal box on the top of the fan case. (2) Disconnect the cable connected from the power distribution box to the motor. (a) Three motor main lead wires (U, V, W) (b) Two cooling fan lead wires (BU, BV) (c) Two thermal protector lead wires (OHS1, OHS2) (d) PCB's external connector mate plug
Fan case Terminal box cover
(3) Remove the external connector from the external connector fixing clamp, and disconnect the internal connector from the socket. (4) The PCB can be removed by removing the pan head screw fixing the PCB. (5) Reassemble the PCB by following steps (1) to (4) in reverse.
Pan head screw for fixing PCB
PCB
External contactor fixing clamp
External connector
Internal connector
Lead wire protection packing
VI - 29
2 Cooling fan 132 frame and smaller (1) Remove the hexagon socket bolt fixing the finger guard.
(2) Remove the flat-head screw at the center of the cooling fan. Only the fan will come off.
(3) Cut the four cooling fan lead wires connected in the terminal box. The fan motor can be removed from the fan case when the pan head screw fixing the fan motor body is removed.
VI - 30
(4) Reassemble the cooling fan by following steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
Fan motor
Finger guard
Fan
160 frame and larger (1) Remove the three hexagon socket bolts fixing the fan case, and pull the fan case backward. The fan case can be removed with the cooling fan attached.
(2) Remove the hexagon socket bolt fixing the finger guard.
VI - 31
(3) Cut the three cooling fan lead wires connected in the terminal box. The cooling fan can be removed from the fan case when the pan head screw fixing the cooling from the inner side of the fan case is removed.
(4) Reassemble the cooling fan by following steps (1) to (3) in reverse.
Cooling fan Finger guard
3 Sensor and detection gears (1) Disconnect the sensor's inner connector from the PCB in the terminal box. (2) Remove the three hexagon socket bolts fixing the fan case, and pull the fan case backward. The fan case can be removed with the cooling fan attached.
VI - 32
(3) When the two pan head screws fixing the sensor installation seat are removed, the installation seat will come off with the sensor attached. Take care not to contact the sensor against the detection gears at this time. (4) To adjust the sensor, loosen the sensor fixing screw with the sensor installation seat fixed. Set a thickness gauge between the detection gears and sensor, and adjust the gap to 0.150.01. Confirm that the sensor's matching marks are aligned before tightening the sensor fixing screws to fix the sensor. (Refer to photo on right.)
Sensor installation seat Sensor Installation seat fixing screw
Thickness gauge
Detection gears
Sensor fixing screw
(5) Apply screw lock on the sensor fixing screw and installation seat fixing screw. (6) Pull the sensor lead wires sufficiently into the terminal box so that they do not get caught inside when assembling the fan case.
Align the matching marks.
(7) To remove the detection gears, screw an eye bolt into the screw hole (MS screw), and by using a puller, turn the puller bolt with a spanner, etc. (8) The detection gears should be assembled onto the shaft with a shrink fit temperature of 100 to 150, while taking care not to twist the gears. If the shrink fit temperature is too high, the detection gears will deform.
VI - 33
4 Bearings (1) The counter-load side bracket can be removed when the shaft box cover fixing screw and bracket fixing hexagon socket bolt are removed. (2) Apply sealing agent on the engagement surface when assembling the counter-load side bracket.
Apply sealing agent Bracket fixing bolt
Shaft box cover fixing screw
(3) To remove the counter-load side bearings, first remove the shaft snap-ring. Then, by using a bearing puller, turn the axis box cover and puller bolt simultaneously with a spanner.
Snap-ring for shaft
(4) To remove the load side bearings, catch the claws of the puller onto the inner ring of the bearings and turn the handle.
VI - 34
(5) Before fitting the bearings onto the shaft, wipe the bearing fitting section clean and remove any scratches or protrusions. (6) Apply oil on the bearing's inner diameter and shaft engagement surface. Fit the bearing on at a right angle, contact a suitable pipe against the inner ring section, and gradually press in with a press.
Press. Pipe Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a press (7) If a press is not available, lightly tap the bearings onto the shaft. Take care not to twist the bearings or contact the pipe against outer ring section.
Pipe
Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a hammer
VI - 35
Confirming the motor built-in encoder (speed detector) waveform The waveform must be confirmed and adjusted before running the motor after disassembly to reassembly. The explanation here is for the encoder without the Z phase. Refer to the separate adjustment procedures (BFN-14052-01) when using the encoder with Z phase. 1. PCB volume layout drawing Check terminals PA: A phase signal PB: B phase signal AGA: Ground Volume VR1: A phase 0 position adjustment VR2: A phase gain adjustment VR3: B phase 0 position adjustment VR4: B phase gain adjustment
2. Confirmation method (1) Set the spindle parameter SP038 (SFNC6) bit F to "1" and turn the spindle amplifier power OFF and ON. (Enter the open loop.) (2) Input the forward run command, and gradually raise the motor speed to 1800rpm. (3) Measure the A and B phase waveforms with an oscilloscope. (4) Confirm that the waveform is as shown below. If not as shown below, adjust with VR1 to VR4. (5) If the waveform cannot be adjusted with VR1 to 4, readjust the gap between the sensor and gear teeth. 1) If voltage level does not decrease below 1.6V: Increase the gap 2) If voltage level does not increase above 1.4V: Decrease the gap (6) Next, reverse run the motor and measure the waveform at 1800rpm. (7) Set the SP038 (SFNC6) bit F to "0" after completing the confirmation and adjustments, and turn the spindle amplifier power OFF and ON.
A phase Voltage [V] B phase Voltage [V] A phase B phase
Time
Time
A phase/B phase output signal waveform during forward run
A phase/B phase output signal waveform during reverse run
VI - 36
3.2 Disassembling and assembling the SJ-N type AC spindle motor

Terminal box cover
1 Cable and PCB (1) Remove the cover of the terminal box on the top of the fan case. (2) Disconnect the cable connected from the power distribution box to the motor. (a) Three motor main lead wires (U, V, W) (b) Two cooling fan lead wires (BU, BV) (c) Two thermal protector lead wires (OHS1, OHS2) (d) PCB's external connector mate plug
Fan case
(3) Remove the external connector from the external connector fixing clamp, and disconnect the internal connector from the socket. (4) The PCB can be removed by removing the pan head screw fixing the PCB. (5) Reassemble the PCB by following steps (1) to (4) in reverse.
Pan head screw for fixing PCB
PCB
External contactor fixing clamp
External connector
Internal connector
Lead wire protection packing
VI - 37
(6) Installing the PCB Method: Fix together with the case using two bolts. Connect the sensor connector. Caution: Do not connect the motor power cable to the bottom of the amplifier.
Motor cable is placed under the amplifier.
Motor cable is protruding on the amplifier.
VI - 38
2 Cooling fan 90 frame (1) When the two hexagon socket bolts fixing the cooling fan are removed, the cooling fan can be removed from the fan case with the finger guard attached.
(2) Reassemble the cooling fan by following step (1) in reverse.
VI - 39
112 frame (1) Remove the hexagon socket bolt fixing the finger guard.
(2) Remove the pan head screw at the center of the cooling fan. Only the fan will come off.
(3) Cut the four cooling fan lead wires connected in the terminal box. The fan motor can be removed from the fan case when the pan head screw fixing the fan motor body is removed.
VI - 40
(4)
Reassemble the cooling fan by following steps (1) to (3) in reverse.

Fan motor
Finger guard
Fan
3 Sensor and detection drum (1) Disconnect the sensor's inner connector from the PCB in the terminal box. (2) Remove the three hexagon socket bolts fixing the fan case, and pull the fan case backward. The fan case can be removed with the cooling fan attached.
Fixing screw for installation
(3) When the two pan head screws fixing the sensor installation seat are removed, the installation seat will come off with the sensor attached. Take care not to contact the sensor against the detection drum at this time.
VI - 41
(4) Installing the sensor Preparation: Clean the sensor block installation surface (motor base) and sensor V-type base side. (Blow with air.) Method: Lightly fix the sensor block with a bolt. (To the degree that the block can be moved.) Tighten the pull-in bolt so that the sensor block is pressed against the installation surface, and the V-type base side contacts the side of the motor base positioning ring. Caution: Make sure that the sensor base does not deviate when the bolt is tightened. Do not apply force on the flexible coupler.
(5) Apply screw lock on the sensor fixing screw and installation seat fixing screw.
(6) Pull the sensor lead wires sufficiently into the terminal box so that they do not get caught inside when assembling the fan case.
VI - 42
(7) Removing the drum Method: Forcibly pull out the drum with a puller jig. Caution: The removed drum cannot be reused.
To remove the detection drum, screw an eye bolt into the screw hole (M8 screw), and by using a puller, turn the puller bolt with a spanner, etc.
(8) Installing the drum Condition: Warm fitting (Heating temperature: 150C or less) Method: Confirm that the drum has been warmed to the designated temperature. Wear leather gloves, etc. when holding the drum, and quickly insert it. Caution: The heating device must not have a magnetic field of 50G or more. Do not wear cotton gloves as they are slippery. Confirmation: Confirm that the drum has been completely inserted.
VI - 43
4 Bearings (1) The counter-load side bracket can be removed when the shaft box cover fixing screw and bracket fixing hexagon socket bolt are removed. (2) Apply sealing agent on the engagement surface when assembling the counter-load side bracket.
Apply sealing agent Bracket fixing bolt
Shaft box cover fixing screw
(3) To remove the counter-load side bearings, first remove the shaft snap-ring. Then, by using a bearing puller, turn the axis box cover and puller bolt simultaneously with a spanner.
Shaft snap-ring
(4) To remove the load side bearings, catch the claws of the puller onto the inner ring of the bearings and turn the handle.
VI - 44
(5) Before fitting the bearings onto the shaft, wipe the bearing fitting section clean and remove any scratches or protrusions. (6) Apply oil on the bearing's inner diameter and shaft engagement surface. Fit the bearing on at a right angle, contact a suitable pipe against the inner ring section, and gradually press in with a press.
Press. Pipe Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a press
(7) If a press is not available, lightly tap the bearings onto the shaft. Take care not to twist the bearings or contact the pipe against outer ring section.
Pipe
Bearing
Attaching the bearings with a hammer
VI - 45
4. Handling the Orientation Detector

4.1 Magnetic sensor type 1-point orientation
4.1.1 Operation of magnet and sensor
The sensor generates two types of voltage according to the positional relation with the magnet as shown in Fig. 6-1.
Rotation direction
Installation plate
Magnet
Detection head
Output voltage Amplifier Output voltage
MS signal +8 to +5V Across CN6 (6) to (16)
-5V to 8V +8 to +5V LS signal Across CN6 (7) to (17)
Fig. 6-1 Sensor output voltage MS signal 0V is output at the center of the magnet, and the maximum voltage is generated at both ends of the magnet. If the position shift amount is "0", control is applied so that the operation stops at the position where this voltage is approx. 0V (center position). The stop position can be changed to approx. 2.5V by setting the position shift. The voltage is approximately constant within the magnet area. Use this to confirm that the operation is stopped without fail within the magnet area. VI - 46
LS signal
4.1.2 Sequences, etc.

(1) Refer to section 1.3.2 Operation sequence (page VI-2) for details on the operation sequences. (2) Refer to section 2.3 for details on the magnet and detection head installation methods, precautions for installation and the outline dimensions.
4.2 Encoder type 4096-point orientation

4.2.1 Configuration
Drive unit
Sequence
M19 M06 NC
Orientation command
Sequence CN10 CN11 Orientation position command (12-bit binary)
PLG CN8 Encoder CN6 1:1 Spindle
Motor

(1) Refer to section 1.3.2 Operation sequence (page VI-2) for details on the operation sequences. (2) Refer to section 2.3 for details on the encoder installation methods, handling methods and the outline dimensions.
4.3 Motor built-in encoder type 4-96-point orientation

(1) Refer to section 1.3.2 Operation sequence (page VI-2) for details on the operation sequences. (2) A detector is incorporated in the motor, so a special detector does not need to be installed. VI - 47
Appendix 1 Parameter Setting List
Appendix 1
Parameter Setting List
MDS-B/C1-SPT Parameter setting list (1/3) Customer: Machine name: [Setting 1] Drive unit : MDS-B/C1-SPT Motor : SJConverter : MDS-B/C1-CV Remarks:
Signal SP001 SP002 SP003 SP004 SP005 SP006 SP007 SP008 SP009 SP010 SP011 SP012 SP013 SP014 SP015 SP016 SP017 SP018 SP019 SP020 SP021 SP022 SP023 SP024 SP025 SP026 SP027 SP028 SP029 SP030 SP031 SP032 SP033 SP034 SP035 SP036 SP037 SP038 SP039 SP040 SP041 SP042 SP043 SP044 SP045 SP046 SP047 SP048 Abbrev. PGM PGE OINP OSP CSP OPST Standard Setting setting 100 100 0 16 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6000 50 30 600 10 63 60 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0 0 0 0 30 15 Signal SP049 SP050 SP051 SP052 SP053 SP054 SP055 SP056 SP057 SP058 SP059 SP060 SP061 SP062 SP063 SP064 SP065 SP066 SP067 SP068 SP069 SP070 SP071 SP072 SP073 SP074 SP075 SP076 SP077 SP078 SP079 SP080 SP081 SP082 SP083 SP084 SP085 SP086 SP087 SP088 SP089 SP090 SP091 SP092 SP093 SP094 SP095 SP096 Abbrev. TLM2 TLM3 TLM4 TLM5 TLM6 TLM7 SETM PYVR STOD MKT MKT2 MKIL OLT OLL VCGN1 VCSN1 VIGWA VIGWB VIGN FHz VR2WA VR2WB VR2GN IGDEC R2KWS FONS TDSL FPWM ILMT ILMA
[Setting 2]
Drive unit : MDS-B/C1-SPT Motor : SJConverter : MDS-B/C1-CV

Signal SP097 SP098 SP099 SP100 SP101 SP102 SP103 SP104 SP105 SP106 SP107 SP108 SP109 SP110 SP111 SP112 SP113 SP114 SP115 SP116 SP117 SP118 SP119 SP120 SP121 SP122 SP123 SP124 SP125 SP126 SP127 SP128 SP129 SP130 SP131 SP132 SP133 SP134 SP135 SP136 SP137 SP138 SP139 SP140 SP141 SP142 SP143 SP144 BN Abbrev. SPECO VGOP VGOI VGOD DINP OODR FTM TLOR IQGO IDGO CSP2 CSP3 CSP4 Standard Setting setting 0000 63 60 15 16 32767 200 100 100 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 542 768 384 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R (1/3)
Standard Setting setting 20 30 40 50 60 70 12 50 0 0 150 500 75 0 60 110 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 75 3000 0 0 0 200 0 0 0 0
TSP ZSP CSN1 SDTS TLM1 VGNP1 VGNI1 GRA1 GRA2 GRA3 GRA4 GRB1 GRB2 GRB3 GRB4 SFNC1 SFNC2 SFNC3 SFNC4 SFNC5 SFNC6 ATYP MTYP PTYP
OPER OSP2 ORUT ORCT MPGH MPGL MPCSH MPCSL MGDO MGD1 MGD2
DIQM DIQN
VRFB PFBC VGHP1 VGHI1 VGHD1 HPYV1 VCGH1 VCSH1 IQGH1 IDGH1
OFSI LMAY VFAV EGAR
CSNT CSN2 SDTR SUT
A1 - 1
VGHP2 VGHI2 VGHD2 HPYV2 VCGH2 U
MDS-B/C1-SPT Parameter setting list (2/3)

Signal SP145 SP146 SP147 SP148 SP149 SP150 SP151 SP152 SP153 SP154 SP155 SP156 SP157 SP158 SP159 SP160 SP161 SP162 SP163 SP164 SP165 SP166 SP167 SP168 SP169 SP170 SP171 SP172 SP173 SP174 SP175 SP176 SP177 SP178 SP179 SP180 SP181 SP182 SP183 SP184 SP185 SP186 SP187 SP188 SP189 SP190 SP191 SP192 SP193 SP194 SP195 SP196 SP197 SP198 SP199 Abbrev. VCSH2 IQGH2 IDGH2 Standard Setting setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Signal SP200 SP201 SP202 SP203 SP204 SP205 SP206 SP207 SP208 SP209 SP210 SP211 SP212 SP213 SP214 SP215 SP216 SP217 SP218 SP219 SP220 SP221 SP222 SP223 SP224 SP225 SP226 SP227 SP228 SP229 SP230 SP231 SP232 SP233 SP234 SP235 SP236 SP237 SP238 SP239 SP240 SP241 SP242 SP243 SP244 SP245 SP246 SP247 SP248 SP249 SP250 SP251 SP252 SP253 SP254 Abbrev. VGHP7 VGHI7 VGHD7 HPYV7 VCGH7 VCSH7 IQGH7 IDGH7 Standard Setting setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Signal SP255 SP256 SP257 SP258 SP259 SP260 SP261 SP262 SP263 SP264 SP265 SP266 SP267 SP268 SP269 SP270 SP271 SP272 SP273 SP274 SP275 SP276 SP277 SP278 SP279 SP280 SP281 SP282 SP283 SP284 SP285 SP286 SP287 SP288 SP289 SP290 SP291 SP292 SP293 SP294 SP295 SP296 SP297 SP298 SP299 SP300 SP301 SP302 SP303 SP304 SP305 SP306 SP307 SP308 SP309 BN Standard Setting setting DA1MPY 0 Abbrev. DA2MPY RPM NR NP NB NF PM PLG KVP KVI KVF KFP KFI PYLT KDP KDI KQP KQI IDSM IQSM KVDS KVQS TMLR TMLD TMLS KWS KWSR IQI M0 M2 FLUX KR2 LR2 ICT KI1 TI VPWM IDLM 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 (2/3)
VGHP3 VGHI3 VGHD3 HPYV3 VCGH3 VCSH3 IQGH3 IDGH3
OXKPH OXKPL OXVKP OXVKI OXSFT
Vavx UTTM OPLP PGHS
FNCO SE2R SE2T
SMO LMO
DA1NO DA2NO
NPM NICNT NICT NCSM NWR1 NWR2 NWR3 NEV0 NEV1 U
A1 - 2
MDS-B/C1-SPT Parameter setting list (3/3)

Signal SP310 SP311 SP312 SP313 SP314 SP315 SP316 SP317 SP318 SP319 SP320 SP321 SP322 SP323 SP324 SP325 SP326 SP327 SP328 SP329 SP330 SP331 SP332 SP333 SP334 Abbrev. NEV2 NEV3 R2H EDO SPO SBS SIQ DPO DBS DIQ BSD RPML NRL NPL NBL NFL PML PLGL KVPL KVIL KVFL KFPL KFIL PYLTL KDPL Standard Setting setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Signal SP335 SP336 SP337 SP338 SP339 SP340 SP341 SP342 SP343 SP344 SP345 SP346 SP347 SP348 SP349 SP350 SP351 SP352 SP353 SP354 SP355 SP356 SP357 SP358 SP359 Abbrev. KDIL KQPL KQIL IDSML IQSML KVDSL KVQSL TMLRL TMLDL TMLSL KWSL KWSRL IQIL MOL M2L FLUXL KR2L LR2L ICTL KIIL TIL VPWML IDLML Standard Setting setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Signal SP360 SP361 SP362 SP363 SP364 SP365 SP366 SP367 SP368 SP369 SP370 SP371 SP372 SP373 SP374 SP375 SP376 SP377 SP378 SP379 SP380 SP381 SP382 SP383 SP384 Abbrev. Standard Setting setting 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
R2HL EDOL SPOL SBSL SIQL DPOL DBSL DIQL BSDL
Revision
BN
(3/3)
A1 - 3
Appendix 2 Unit Conversion Table
Appendix 2
Unit Conversion Table
The correspondence of the conventional unit symbols used in this manual and the international unit system (SI) is as shown below.
Unit symbols for SI Conventional unit's unit and unit usable in symbol combination Kg f The value is the same Mass Weight/load (concept of force) Force Torque Inertia (J) GD2 kg
Name of amount Weight/load (expresses mass)
Conversion value
Kg f Kg f Kg f cm Kg f cm s Kg f cm2
2
N N Nm kg m2
1kg f=9.80665N 1kg f=9.80665N 1kg f cm=9.8066510-2N m 1kg f cm s2=9.8066510-2kg m2

GD2 4g
J=
(g: Gravitational acceleration 980cm/s2)
A2 - 1
Appendix 3 Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
Appendix 3
1. Outline
Explanation of Large Capacity Spindle Unit Specifications
The MDS-B-SPT Series large capacity spindle unit (37kW, 45kW, 55kW) is an increased capacity version of the MDS-B-SPT Series standard spindle unit (30kW or less). Thus, the specification items other than those related to the increased capacity are the same as the 30kW or less capacity. The items required for the increased capacity are explained in these specifications. Refer to the "AC Servo/Spindle MDS-A Series/B Series Specifications Manual" (BNP-B3759) for details on the other specifications.
2. List of units
Power supply unit DC power supply/regeneration control to drive unit CapaMass Outline No. Type city (kg) drawing (kW) (1) (2) (3) B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 37 45 55 9.5 20 21 "6.(1)" "6.(2)" "6.(3)" Spindle drive unit Spindle motor control Capacity (kW) 37 45 55 Mass (kg) 20 21 21 Outline drawing "6.(4)" "6.(5)" "6.(5)"
No. (1) (2) (3)
Type B-SPT-370 B-SPT-450 B-SPT-550
3. Selection of AC reactor (B-AL), contactor and NFB

Always install the following AC reactor and contactor on the input side of each power supply unit (B-CVE-370/450/550). Note that only the contactor can be omitted for the B-CVE-370. (Note 1) When using the MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550, always install one contactor for one power supply unit. The power supply unit will be damaged if this contactor is omitted or shared. (Note 2) Always install one ACL for one power supply unit. The power supply unit will be damaged if this ACL is omitted or shared. Selection of the NFB when using only one power supply unit is shown below as reference.
Power supply unit type AC reactor (ordered part) Recommended contactor (non-ordered part) Recommended NFB (non-ordered part) B-CVE-370 B-AL-37K SN150-AC200V NF225CS3P175A05 B-CVE-450 B-AL-45K SN150-AC200V NF225CS3P200A05 B-CVE-550 B-AL-55K SN180-AC200V NF400CS3P300A05 Outline drawing "6 (6)"
(Note)
Even when OFF, a leakage current of 15mA or less flows through the coil connection terminal MC1 for the power supply unit's external contactor. Thus, when using a contactor other than that recommended above, do not use a connector that turns ON at 15mA or less or a contactor that cannot be turned OFF at 15mA. When using a contactor with an internal electronic circuit, consult with the contactor manufacturer and make sure that the contactor will operate correctly even if a leakage current of 15mA or less flows.
A3 - 1
[Power supply unit] [Spindle drive unit]
4. Outline of units
Inside panel
Outside panel Inside panel
Outside panel
400
380
Power Fin + fan supply unit 340 400 380
Spindle drive unit
Fin + fan
340
A3 - 2
Maintenance area 250 (Side) D1 D2 Maintenance area D1 250 (Side) D2 Spindle drive unit MDS-B-CVE-550 300 210 120 MDS-B-SPT-370 240 210 115 MDS-B-SPT-450 300 210 120 MDS-B-SPT-550 300 210 120
(Front)
Power supply unit
Type
MDS-B-CVE-370
MDS-B-CVE-450
150
240
D1
200
210
D2
120
115
Note)
The D1 value includes the terminal block cover.
Panel cut dimension drawing

W1 W3
W2
W5
Square hole H
Square hole
5. Panel cut dimension drawing
H1
(Note 1) Looking from the front of the unit, the spindle drive unit must be installed to the left of the power supply unit. The panel must be cut taking this into consideration. (Note 2) L+ and L- connection conductors are enclosed with the CVE-450 and 550 capacities, so provide the dimensions between the units as shown below. (Note 3) When using the CVE-260 to 300 capacities, cut the panel in the same manner as for the CVE-370 capacity.
H2 W Power supply unit installation side 8-M5 screw
A3 - 3
MDS-B-CVE-550 3600.3 2821 3411 100.5 1800.3 510.5 180.5 1200.5 MDS-B-SPT-370 3600.3 2221 3411 100.5 1200.3 510.5
W4
Spindle drive unit installation side
(Front) Spindle drive unit MDS-B-SPT-450 3600.3 2821 3411 100.5 1800.3 510.5 MDS-B-SPT-550 3600.3 2821 3411 100.5 1800.3 510.5
Power supply unit
Type
MDS-B-CVE-370
MDS-B-CVE-450
3600.3
3600.3
1421
2221
H1
3411
3411
H2
100.5
100.5
W1
600.3
1200.3
W2
W3
410.5
510.5
W4
130.5
180.5
W5
1050.5
1200.5
6. Detailed outline drawing

(Note) The I-bolt installation hole is provided only on the top of the MDS-B-CVE-550 and MDS-B-SPT-450/550 models. The I-bolt (size: M10) is not enclosed, and must be prepared by the user. Use an I-bolt that is between 13mm and 25mm long. (1) MDS-B-CVE-370
2-6 hole 66 10 107 15 195 360 380 350
40.6
Fin
L+ L
L11 L21 MC1 AIR FLOW
10
6 45
6 60 150
15
70
20
180
120
(2) MDS-B-CVE-450
180 10 18 21
AIR FLOW
178.5
360 380 344
L+ L
Fin
L+ L
L11 L12 MC1 L21 L22 MC2
L1 L2 L3 10 18 20 63 146 114
60
4-6 hole 120 240
60
A3 - 4
339
(3) MDS-B-CVE-550
64
2-M10 screw, for I-bolt installation Only on top 180 10 18 20

AIR FLOW
178.5
360 380 344
Fin
L+ L
L+ L
L11 L12 MC1 L21 L22MC2
L1 4-6 hole 180 300
L2
L3 10 18 20 63 146 120
60
60
(4) MDS-B-SPT-370
180 10 18 21
AIR FLOW
178.5
340
360 380 344
L+ L
Fin
L11 L21
10
18
60
4-6 hole 120 240
60
62
146
114
A3 - 5
20
339
(5) MDS-B-SPT-450/550
64
2-M10 screw, for I-bolt installation Only on top
180 10 18 20
AIR FLOW
360 380 344
178.5
Fin
L+ L
L11 L21
U 4-6 hole 180 300
W 10 18 20 63 146 120
60
60
(6) ACL
1) 37kW, 45kW
(for wire connection) 6-M6 screw
2) 55kW
6-M10 screw (for wire connection) M5 screw FG connection position 4-1015 slot (installation hole) Terminal cover
MAIN 1 D D331 D D
M5 screw FG connection position (with ground 701 mark) PE connection position Terminal cover
DRIVE
DRIVE
4-815 slot (installation hole)
2001.5
PE connection position (with ground mark)
145 45
75 175
2152.5
ACL model B-AL-37K B-AL-45K Compatible power supply unit B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 D3 D Mass ACL model
2202.5
Compatible power supply unit D3 D Mass
110 150 10.0kg 120 160 12.8kg
B-AL-55K B-CVE-550
200 320 10.0kg
A3 - 6
90 190
D D2.5
L11 L12
L21 L22
L31 L32
D3 1.5 1.5 D3
(240) (240)
L11 L12
L21 L22
L31 L32
MAIN
340
7. Heating value
(1) Power supply unit
Model B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 Heating value (W) 400 500 600
(2) Spindle drive unit

Model B-SPT-370 B-SPT-450 B-SPT-550 Heating value (W) 850 1000 1200
(Note 1) The heating value is the value at the continuous rated output. (Note 2) Use the following expressions as a guide for the heating value outside the panel when installing in an enclosed structure.
Unit B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450,550 B-SPT-370,450,550 Heating value outside panel Heating value outside panel = (B-CVE heating value - 15) 0.75 Heating value outside panel = (B-CVE heating value - 30) 0.75 Heating value outside panel = (B-SPT heating value - 40) 0.75
8. Selection of power capacity

The power capacity required for the power supply unit is shown below.
Power supply unit model B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 Power capacity (kVA) 54 63 77
9. Selecting of wire size

(1) Recommended power lead-in wire size Select the wire size based on the power supply unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Power supply unit model B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 Recommended power-lead-in wire size HIV50mm2 HIV60mm2 HIV80mm2
(2) Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire Select the wire size based on the spindle drive unit capacity as shown below regardless of the motor type.
Spindle drive unit model B-SPT-370 B-SPT-450 B-SPT-550 Recommended wire size for spindle motor output wire HIV50mm2 HIV60mm2 HIV80mm2
(3) L+, L- link bar wire size

Power supply unit model B-CVE-370 B-CVE-450 B-CVE-550 L+, L- link bar wire size HIV50mm2 Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories) Dedicated link bars are enclosed as accessories (always use accessories)
(4) L11, L21, MC1 Regardless of the spindle drive unit and power supply unit capacities, use an IV2mm2 or more wire size. A3 - 7
10. Drive unit connection screw size

Type L1, L2, L3 U, V, W L+, LL11, L21 MC1 B-CVE-370 M8 M6 M4 M4 Power supply unit B-CVE-450 M8 M10 M4 M4 M6 M10 M4 M4 B-CVE-550 M10 M6 Spindle drive unit B-SPT-370 B-SPT-450 B-SPT-550 M8 M10 M4 M10 M10 M4 -
Left side Right side Left side Right side

(1) Wiring system The wiring system is the same as the standard MDS-A/B-SPT Series (30kW or less). (Refer to the wiring system example below.) Note that there are restrictions on installation and selection, so refer to the Restrictions given in "12". (a) When using MDS-B-CVE-370 or less
NC MDS-B-SP(H) 370 to 550

CN1A CN1B
MDS-B-CVE 260 to 370

CN1A CN1B CN3 CN4
MDS-B -Vx
CN4
To terminator or battery unit
CN9
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
CN8
CN9
L+ L+ L L11 L21 U V W L1
L11 L21 MC 1
CN2
CN9
L+ L L L11 L21 U V W
L2 L3
MC
Contactor
AC reactor PLG MAG ENC Spindle motor NFB For motor blower Servomotor B-AL
NFB
3 200VAC 50Hz 3 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
A3 - 8
(b) When using MDS-B-CVE-450 or 550
NC
CN1A CN1B
MDS-B-SP(H)-370 to 550 To terminator or battery unit
MDS-B-CVE-450 to 550
CN1A CN1B CN3 CN4
MDS-B-Vx
CN9
CN4
CN9
CN4
CN5
CN6
CN7
CN8
Always use the link bar enclosed with B-CVE.
L+ L
Upper step
L+ L L11L12 MC1 W
L21L22 MC2
Lower step
CN2
CN9
L11 L21 L1 L2 L3 U V W
L11L21
Contactor AC reactor Servomotor PLG MAG ENC Spindle motor NFB For motor blower NFB B-AL
3 200VAC 50Hz 3 200 to 220VAC 60Hz
(Note 1) Connect the L11, L21 and MC1 external connections without removing the conductors connected between L21 and L22, L22 and MC2, and L11 and L12 of the B-CVE-450/550. (L12, L22 and MC2 are for special specifications, and normally, the external connection is not required.) (Note 2) Always connect the contactor to MC1 so that it can be controlled with the drive unit's internal signal. The power supply unit could be damaged if the contactor is turned ON and OFF with a separate user-prepared sequence.
A3 - 9
12. Restrictions
(1) Installation
Always install the B-SPT-370/450/550 to the left of the B-CVE-260 to 550. When using B-CVE-450/550, always use the enclosed link bar to connect L+ and L- on the B-SPT-370/450/550. (a) Layout when connecting only one spindle drive unit to power supply unit Install the B-CVE-260 to 370/450/550 to the right, and the B-SPT-370/450/550 to the left. Always cut the panel according to the panel cut dimension drawings shown in "5". <Refer to Example 1.> (b) Layout when connecting multiple drive units to a large capacity power supply unit The following number of servo/spindle drive units can be additionally connected. When B-CVE-450 and B-SPT-370 are combined, 9kW (=45kW-37kW+1kW) When B-CVE-550 and B-SPT-450 are combined, 11kW =55kW-45kW+1kW) When B-CVE-450 and B-SPT-370 are combined, 19kW (=55kW-37kW+1kW) worth of units' servo/spindle drive unit can be additionally added. In this case, install the B-SPT-370/450 to the left of B-CVE-450/550 as shown in the panel cut dimension drawings in "5". Install the additional drive units to the right of the B-CVE-450/ 550. If the spindle motor output differs from the spindle drive unit output, the above, excluding the layout, may not always apply. (This is because the power supply unit output is determined by the motor output.) <Refer to Example 2.>
(2) Selection
(a) When using the B-CVE-450/550, one of the B-SPT-370/450/550 units must be selected for the drive units connected to this power supply unit. Only one B-SPT-370/450/550 can be connected to one B-CVE-450/550. (b) When using B-SPT-370/450/550, the following power supply unit must be selected. When using B-SPT-370: Select B-CVE-260 or more When using B-SPT-450: Select B-CVE-300 or more When using B-SPT-550: Select B-CVE-370 or more Note that if the total of the servo/spindle motor output corresponds to the above power supply unit with the normal selection method, that capacity power supply unit can be selected.
(Example 3) When using B-SPT-370 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23kW or less: Select B-CVE-260 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 23.1kW or more: Select power supply unit selected with normal selection method. (Example 4) When using B-SPT-450 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 27kW or less: Select B-CVE-300 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 27.1kW or more: Select power supply unit selected with normal selection method. (Example 5) When using B-SPT-550 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 31kW or less: Select B-CVE-370 When total of servo/spindle motor output is 31.1kW or more: Select power supply unit selected with normal selection method.
A3 - 10
(Example 1)
SP-450 CVE-450
(Example 2)
SP-370 CVE-450 V1-452
13. Parameters
The parameters added and changed for the 30kW or less drive unit are as shown below. The parameters other than those shown below are the same as the 30kW or less capacity. Refer to the "AC Servo/Spindle MDS-A Series/B Series Specifications Manual" (BNP-B3759) for details.
No. SP039 Abbrev. ATYP Details Select the capacity of the drive unit to be used. Setting value 000D 000E 0010 TYP HEX setting
Drive unit type MDS-B-SPT-370 MDS-B-SPT-450 MDS-B-SPT-550
SP041
PTYP
Select the capacity of the power supply unit to be used. Setting value 0126 0130 0137 0145 0155
HEX setting
Power supply unit type MDS-B-CVE-260 MDS-B-CVE-300 MDS-B-CVE-370 MDS-B-CVE-450 MDS-B-CVE-550
(Note 1) When using the external emergency stop function, add 40 to the above setting value. (Example) When using external emergency stop function with B-CVE-450 0145+0040=0185
14. Precautions
(1) After turning the power OFF, wait at least 15 seconds before turning it ON again. If the power is turned ON within 15 seconds, the drive unit's control power may not start up correctly.
A3 - 11
Revision History
Date of revision Dec. 2004 Manual No. BNP-C3015A First edition created. Revision details
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible. Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments regarding the use of this product.
Duplication Prohibited
This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MODEL MODEL CODE Manual No.
MDS-B-SPT/MDS-C1-SPT Series 008-342 BNP-C3015A(ENG)

Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan on recycled paper.
(0412) MEE

BNP C3015 PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

BNP C3015 PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

CNC

AC SPINDLE MDS-B-SPT Series MDS-C1-SPT Series

SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Notes on Reading This Manual

Precautions for safety

Note that some items described as

CAUTION may lead to major results depending on

For Safety Use

Control output signal

(3) Trial operation and adjustment

(6) Maintenance, inspection and part replacement

Compliance to European EC Directives

2. Cautions for EC Directive compliance

Reinforced isolating transformer No-fuse breaker NFB

Servo/ spindle drive

Insulation tube Wire

I. MDS-B/C1-SPT Spindle System Configuration Section

1.2 Precautions for use

L+, LL11, L21

Power supply RST NFB 1

Magnetic sensor Spindle motor Spindle motor fan power supply ST

(3) List of unit dimensions Outline type A1

W: 90 D: 300 Fin section: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120

W: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120

Outline drawing (mm)

The A0 type has no fin. (Depth: 180)

W: 90 D: 300 Fin section: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120

W: 120 D: 300 Fin section: 120

Outline drawing (mm)

The A0 type has no fin. (Depth: 180)

Power distribution box 40

Power distribution box

Cover Outtake 40 Partition

Front view of units

4. Connection of Each Unit

4. Connection of Each Unit

MDS-B/C1-SPT (Spindle drive)

MDS-B/C1-CV (Power supply)

L+ LL11 L21 MC1

4. Connection of Each Unit

4.1 Layout of each unit

4.2 Link bar specifications

4. Connection of Each Unit

4. Connection of Each Unit

4.3 Precautions for installing multiple power supply units

C N 4 MC1 L+, LL11, L21 L1, L2, L3

C N 4 MC1 L+, LL11, L21 L1, L2, L3

AC reactor (A/B-AL NO.1) MC

200VAC AC reactor (A/B-AL NO.2)

4. Connection of Each Unit

L+, LL11, L21

200VAC AC reactor (A/B-AL)

5. Connector and Cable Specifications

Cable creation tool (Maker)

CNP6M cable CNP6A cable

CN8A, Same as above 10, 11, 12 cable

TS-91026 2P0.3SQ +10P0.2SQ (DDK)

5.2 Cable details

10320-3210-000 10PVV-SB AWG2810P (BK0-NC9072) 10120-6000EL

Fix shield onto connector case

Fix shield onto connector case

5.2.2 Spindle control circuit cable list